Mercedes Benz 2001 C Class Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2001-C-Class-Owners-Manual-763283 mercedes-benz-2001-c-class-owners-manual-763283 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 381

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

C-class
Operator’s Manual

C 240
C 320

Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Further, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of
ownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:
• Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
• Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
• Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety
of the vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.
DaimlerChrysler AG

Introduction
Product information .......................... 1
Operator’s manual ............................. 2
Where to find it .................................. 7
Reporting Safety Defects .................. 9

Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls ............... 12
Door control panel ....................... 14
Overhead control panel ............... 15
Dashboard ..................................... 16
Center console .............................. 18

Contents

Choosing global or selective
mode on remote control ............. 27
Opening the trunk ....................... 28
Opening and closing windows
and sliding / pop-up roof
from outside ................................. 29
Panic button ................................. 30
Mechanical keys .......................... 30
Doors ..................................................31
Central locking switch .................... 33
Automatic central locking .............. 34
Emergency unlocking
in case of accident ...................... 34
Trunk ................................................. 35
Trunk lid release switch ................ 37
Antitheft alarm system ................... 38
Tow-away alarm ............................... 39
Easy-entry/exit feature ...................41
Front seat adjustment ..................... 42
Removal and installation of
front seat head restraints .......... 47
Multicontour seat ............................ 49
Heated seats ..................................... 50
Rear seat head restraints ............... 52

Seat belts and integrated
restraint system ..........................55
Seat belts ...........................................55
Seat belt nonusage
warning system ...........................56
BabySmartTM airbag
deactivation system ....................62
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) ...............................63
Emergency tensioning
retractor (ETR) .............................64
Airbags ..............................................65
Safety guidelines for the seat
belt, emergency tensioning
retractor and airbag ....................72
Infant and child
restraint systems .........................73
Steering wheel adjustment
(manual) .......................................77
Steering wheel adjustment
(electrical) ....................................79
Rear view mirrors ............................80
Instrument cluster ...........................88
Multifunction steering wheel,
multifunction display .................92

Contents

Trip and main odometer, FSS, coolant
temperature, vehicle speed,
engine oil level indicator ...........96
Audio systems ..................................98
Radio ..............................................98
CD player .......................................99
Cassette player ........................... 100
Telephone ........................................ 101
Navigation system .......................... 106
Trip computer ................................. 107
Malfunction/warning
message memory ...................... 109
Individual settings ..........................111
Setting the audio volume ..............123
Coolant temperature gauge ..........124
Flexible service system
(FSS) ............................................125
Engine oil level indicator ..............128
Engine oil consumption ................129
Exterior lamp switch ..................... 130
Headlamp mode ............................. 131

Night security illumination ..........132
Locator lighting ...........................133
Headlamp cleaning system ...........133
Combination switch .......................134
Hazard warning flasher
switch ..........................................137
Climate control ...............................138
Automatic climate control ............ 146
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation ..........158
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air outlets ................159
Operation Audio and telephone ...160
Operating safety .............................160
Operating and
display elements ........................161
Button and soft key operation ......163
Operation .........................................163
Power windows ...............................184
Sliding/pop-up roof ........................187
Interior lighting ..............................189
Rear window sunshade .................191

Sun visors ....................................... 192
Vanity mirrors ................................ 192
Interior ............................................ 193
Storage compartments and
armrests ..................................... 193
Glove box ..................................... 194
Cup holder ...................................... 197
Ashtrays .......................................... 199
Lighter .............................................201
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell .......................................202
Ski sack ...........................................202
Enlarged cargo area .......................207
Split folding rear seat bench ........207
Loading instructions
(vehicle with enlarged
cargo area) ..................................209
Cellular telephone ......................... 210
Telephone, general ........................ 211
Garage door opener ....................... 212

Driving
Control and operation of radio
transmitters ............................... 218
The first 1 000 miles
(1 500 km) ................................. 219
Maintenance ................................... 219
Tele Aid ...........................................220
Catalytic converter ........................228
Emission control ............................229
Starter switch .................................230
Starting and turning
off the engine ............................232
Manual transmission ....................233
Automatic transmission ...............234
Parking brake .................................243
Driving instructions ......................244
Drive sensibly – Save Fuel ........244
Drinking and driving .................244
Pedals ...........................................244

Contents

Power assistance ........................ 245
Brakes .......................................... 245
Driving off ................................... 246
Parking ........................................ 246
Tires ............................................. 247
Snow chains ............................... 250
Winter driving
instructions ................................ 250
Deep water .................................. 252
Passenger compartment ........... 253
Traveling abroad ........................ 253
Cruise control ................................ 254
Brake assist system (BAS) ............ 257
Antilock brake system
(ABS) .......................................... 258
Electronic stability program
(ESP) ........................................... 260
What you should know at the gas
station ......................................... 264
Check regularly and before a long
trip .............................................. 266

Instrument cluster display
Malfunction and indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster .............268
On-board diagnostic system .........268
Check engine malfunction
indicator lamp .............................268
Brake warning lamp ..................270
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) indicator lamp .................. 271
Fuel reserve warning ................. 271
ABS malfunction
indicator lamp .............................272
Electronic stability program
(ESP) — warning lamp ...............273
Seat belt nonusage
warning lamp ............................273
Malfunction and indicator lamp in
the center console .....................273
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .....273

Contents

Malfunction and warning messages
in the multifunction display ... 274
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE ................275
BATTERY / ALTERNATOR ........ 276
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM .....277
BRAKE ASSIST ...........................277
BRAKE LINING WEAR ..............278
BRAKE FLUID .............................278
PARKING BRAKE .......................279
SEAT BELT SYSTEM ...................279
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
(Electronic stability program) ..280
COOLANT (coolant level) ..........281
COOLANT
(coolant temperature) ................282

ENGINE OIL LEVEL ................... 283
LIGHTING SYSTEM ................... 284
LIGHT SENSOR .......................... 286
DOOR ........................................... 286
TRUNK OPEN ............................. 287
HOOD ........................................... 287
TELEPHONE – FUNCTION ....... 288
TELE AID ..................................... 288
WASHER FLUID ......................... 289
RESTRAINT SYSTEM ................ 290
KEY .............................................. 290
FUEL RESERVE .......................... 291
UNDERVOLTAGE ....................... 291
STEER. WHEEL ADJUST. .......... 292
ENTRANCE POSITION .............. 292

Practical hints
First aid kit .....................................294
Stowing things in the vehicle ......294
Fuses ................................................295
Hood .................................................297
Checking engine oil level .............300
Automatic transmission fluid
level .............................................301
Coolant level ...................................301
Adding coolant ...........................302
Windshield and headlamp washer
system .........................................302
Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage
compartment .............................304
Vehicle jack .....................................305

Wheels .............................................306
Tire replacement ........................306
Rotating wheels ..........................307
Spare wheel ....................................308
Changing wheels ...........................309
Tire inflation pressure .................. 315
Battery ............................................. 316
Jump starting .................................. 318
Towing the vehicle .........................321
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking ...................325
Exterior lamps ................................326
Replacing bulbs ..........................326
Trunk lamp .....................................331
Changing batteries in the electronic
main key .....................................332

Contents

Synchronizing remote
control ......................................... 334
Emergency engine shut-down ..... 334
Fuel filler flap, manual release ... 335
Replacing wiper blade insert ...... 337
Roof rack ......................................... 338

Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of
the vehicle ................................. 340
Power washer ............................. 341
Tar stains .................................... 341
Paintwork, painted body
components ................................ 341
Engine cleaning ......................... 342
Vehicle washing ......................... 342

Ornamental moldings ................343
Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal
lenses ...........................................343
Window cleaning .......................343
Wiper blade .................................343
Light alloy wheels ......................344
Instrument cluster .....................344
Steering wheel and gear selector
lever ..............................................344
Cup holder ...................................344
Seat belts .....................................345
Headliner and shelf below rear
window ........................................345
Leather upholstery .....................345
Hard plastic trim items .............345
Plastic and rubber parts ............345

Contents

Technical data
Spare parts service ........................348
Warranty coverage .........................348
Identification labels .......................349
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............350
Technical data ................................351
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. capacities ...................................355
Engine oils ......................................357

Engine oil additives ...................... 357
Air conditioner refrigerant .......... 357
Brake fluid ...................................... 357
Premium unleaded gasoline ........ 358
Fuel requirements ........................ 358
Gasoline additives ......................... 359
Coolants .......................................... 359
Consumer information ................. 361
Uniform tire quality grading ....... 361

Index
Index.................................................364

Product information
Kindly observe the following in your own best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories
explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and their special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible
for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other
agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance
or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on
permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.

Introduction

Operator’s manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize
yourself with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings
contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations
for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment,
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
• New Car Limited Warranty,
• Emission System Warranty,
• Emission Performance Warranty,
• California, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
(California, Massachusetts, and Vermont only),
• State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws).

Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC or its authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fails to conform the vehicle to its express warranties
after a reasonable number of repair attempts during the period of one year or 12 000 miles from original delivery of
the vehicle. A reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer (1) if the vehicle is out of service by
reason of repair of substantial nonconformities for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days or (2) the same
substantial non-conformity has been subject to repair four or more times and you have at least once directly
notified us in writing of the need to repair the non-conformity and have given us an opportunity to perform the
repair ourselves. Notifications should be sent to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Regional Office listed in the
Service and Warranty Information Booklet.
Maintenance
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.

Introduction

Roadside assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown.
Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can
contact you should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and
Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
• Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,
• unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage
the catalysts,
• gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details,
consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Introduction

In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5

Introduction

We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make
changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual
might differ from your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they
are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your
vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.

Where to find it
The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections:
• Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.
• Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its operation.
• Driving: Important information on driving.
• Instrument cluster display: Displays and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions.
• Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency.
• Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle.
• Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels,
coolants, lubricants etc. is contained here.
• Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly.
Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s equipment.
Explanation of color used:
Warning notices for the protection of yourself and
others appear on red background.

Introduction

Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect
its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your
satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if
necessary contact us at the following addresses:
In the USA:

In Canada:

Client Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5

For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393
(or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.

Introduction

Contents - Instruments and controls
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

11
Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instruments and controls

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Instruments and controls

P68.10-2421-29

Index

1 Door control panel, see page 14

3 Dashboard, see page 16

2 Overhead control panel, see page 15

4 Center console, see page 18

Instruments and controls
Instruments
and controls

Operation

13
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Instruments and controls
Door control panel

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

14
1 Door handle, pull to open, see page 31
2 Memory function (for storing seat, steering wheel
and exterior rear view mirror settings), see page 85
3 Front seat adjustment, see page 42
4 Steering wheel adjustment, see page 79
5 Power windows, see page 184
6 Switch for rear door window override, see page 184
and 186
7 Trunk lid release switch, see page 37

Index

Overhead control panel

1 Interior lighting, see page 189
2 Tele Aid (emergency call system), see page 220
3 Sliding/pop-up roof, see page 187
4 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid and optional
telephone with voice recognition system
5 Rear view mirror, see page 80
6 Garage door opener, see page 212

Instruments and controls
Instruments
and controls

Operation

15
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Instruments and controls

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Dashboard

11
12

9
7

14
6

P68.10-2420-29

Index

1 Hood lock release, see page 297

10 Multifunction steering wheel, see page 92
Horn (with electronic key in starter switch
position 1 or 2)

2 Parking brake pedal, see page 243
3 Steering wheel adjustment (manual), see page 77

11 Instrument cluster, see page 88

4 Parking brake release, see page 243
5 Exterior lamp switch, see page 130

12 Voice recognition system switch, see separate
operating instructions

6 Combination switch, see page 134

13 Starter switch, see page 230

7 Exterior mirror adjustment, see page 81

14 Glove box lid release, see page 194

8 Headlamp washer button, see page 133

15 Glove box lock, see page 194

9 Cruise control switch, see page 254

Instruments and controls
Instruments
and controls

Operation

17
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Instruments and controls
Center console

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

18
1 Left front seat heater switch, see page 50
2 Rear window sunshade (optional), see page 191
3 ESP (electronic stability program) control switch,
see page 260
4 Hazard warning flasher switch, see page 137
5 Central locking switch, see page 33
6 Rear seat head restraints, see page 52
7 Antitheft alarm system, see page 38
Switch for tow-away protection, see page 39
8 Right front seat heater switch, see page 50
9 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp, see page 273
10 COMAND system (optional), see separate
operating instructions, or
audio system, see page 160
11 Climate control (C 240), see page 138
Automatic climate control (C 320) see page 146
Rear window defroster, see page 157

Index

12 Ashtray, see page 199

14 Storage compartment, see page 195

13 Automatic transmission, see page 234, or
Manual transmission, see page 233

15 Armrest, see page 195
Storage compartment, see page 201

Instruments and controls
Instruments
and controls

Operation

19
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Contents - Operation

Operation
Vehicle keys ......................................22
Start lock-out ....................................24
General notes on the
central locking system ...............24
Central locking system ...................25
Radio frequency and
infrared remote control ...............25
Locking and unlocking ................27
Choosing global or selective
mode on remote control ..............27
Opening the trunk .......................28
Opening and closing windows
and sliding / pop-up roof
from outside ..................................29
Panic button ..................................30
Mechanical keys ...........................30
Doors .................................................. 31
Central locking switch ....................33
Automatic central locking ..............34
Emergency unlocking
in case of accident ......................34
Trunk .................................................35
Trunk lid release switch .................37

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

20
Antitheft alarm system ................... 38
Tow-away alarm ............................... 39
Easy-entry/exit feature ...................41
Front seat adjustment ..................... 42
Removal and installation of
front seat head restraints .......... 47
Multicontour seat ............................ 49
Heated seats ..................................... 50
Rear seat head restraints ............... 52
Seat belts and integrated
restraint system .......................... 55
Seat belts .......................................... 55
Seat belt nonusage
warning system .......................... 56
BabySmartTM airbag
deactivation system ................... 62
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) ............................... 63
Emergency tensioning
retractor (ETR) ............................ 64
Airbags .............................................. 65
Safety guidelines for the seat
belt, emergency tensioning
retractor and airbag ................... 72

Infant and child
restraint systems .........................73
Steering wheel adjustment
(manual) .......................................77
Steering wheel adjustment
(electrical) ....................................79
Rear view mirrors ............................80
Instrument cluster ...........................88
Multifunction steering wheel,
multifunction display .................92
Trip and main odometer, FSS, coolant
temperature, vehicle speed,
engine oil level indicator ...........96
Audio systems ..................................98
Radio ..............................................98
CD player .......................................99
Cassette player ........................... 100
Telephone ........................................ 101
Navigation system .......................... 106
Trip computer ................................. 107
Malfunction/warning
message memory ...................... 109
Individual settings ..........................111
Setting the audio volume .............123

Index

Coolant temperature gauge ..........124
Flexible service system
(FSS) ............................................125
Engine oil level indicator ..............128
Engine oil consumption ................129
Exterior lamp switch ..................... 130
Headlamp mode ............................. 131
Night security illumination ......... 132
Locator lighting .......................... 133
Headlamp cleaning system .......... 133
Combination switch ...................... 134
Hazard warning flasher
switch .......................................... 137
Climate control ............................... 138
Automatic climate control ............ 146
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation ......... 158

Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air outlets ................159
Operation Audio and telephone ...160
Operating safety .............................160
Operating and
display elements ........................161
Button and soft key operation ......163
Operation .........................................163
Power windows ...............................184
Sliding/pop-up roof ........................187
Interior lighting ..............................189
Rear window sunshade .................191
Sun visors ........................................192
Vanity mirrors ................................192
Interior .............................................193

Contents - Operation
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Storage compartments and
armrests ..................................... 193
Glove box ..................................... 194
Cup holder ...................................... 197
Ashtrays .......................................... 199
Lighter .............................................201
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell .......................................202
Ski sack ...........................................202
Enlarged cargo area .......................207
Split folding rear seat bench ........207
Loading instructions
(vehicle with enlarged
cargo area) ..................................209
Cellular telephone ......................... 210
Telephone, general ........................ 211
Garage door opener ....................... 212

21
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Central locking system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Vehicle keys

Warning!

Included with your vehicle are 2 electronic main keys
with integrated radio frequency and infrared remote
controls plus removable mechanical key.

When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.

The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two electronic main keys are a different color to help
distinguish it.

Index

Electronic main key

When using the mechanical key (2) for lock operations,
it can be removed by sliding it out of the remote control.
To do so, move locking tab (3) to the right and slide the
mechanical key (2) in direction of arrow (4).
The remote control transmitter is located in the
electronic main key.
1

The infrared receivers are located in the front door
handles.
Note:

Remove the mechanical key from the electronic main
key when using valet parking service. To prevent access
to trunk or storage compartments lock them separately
and retain the mechanical key.

2
4

P80.35-2031-26

The electronic main key has an integrated radio
frequency and infrared remote control, plus removable
mechanical key.

See page 35 for separate locking of trunk and page 194
for locking of glove box.

The remote control (1) operates all locks on the vehicle.

Obtaining replacement keys

The mechanical key (2) works only in the driver’s door,
trunk, and storage compartment locks.

Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking
system requiring a special key manufacturing process.
For security reasons, replacement keys can only be
obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Central locking system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

23
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Central locking system
Start lock-out
Important!
Removing the electronic key from the starter switch
activates the start lock-out. The engine cannot be
started.
Inserting the electronic key in the starter switch
deactivates the start lock-out.
Note:
In case the engine cannot be started (vehicle’s battery is
in order), the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FORMERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

24
General notes on the central locking system
• If the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch,
the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the
remote control.
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked:
• Aim transmitter eye at a receiver of either front door
handle. Check the batteries of the electronic main
key, see page 332, or synchronize the electronic
main key, see page 334.
• Use the mechanical key to unlock the vehicle. To
start engine, insert the electronic key in the starter
switch. There could be a slight delay until the
electronic key can be turned in the starter switch.
Important!
When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.

Index

Central locking system
4

Radio frequency and infrared remote control
3

The electronic main key has an integrated radio
frequency and infrared remote control.

2
1

Due to the extended operational range of the remote
control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or
unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button. If
one of the transmit buttons is pressed, the battery check
lamp lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are
in order. See page 332 for checking batteries.

5
P80.35-2032-26

The vehicle doors, trunk and fuel filler flap can be
centrally locked and unlocked via remote control.

1 Transmit button
‹ Locking

Opening and closing the windows and sliding/pop-up
roof can only be done with the infrared portion of the
remote control. Aim transmitter eye at a receiver (6
or 7), press and hold transmit button Œ or ‹,
see page 29.

Œ Unlocking
Š Opening trunk (if not separately locked)
2 Lamp for battery check (see page 332 for changing
batteries if it does not light up briefly)

With vehicle centrally locked, the trunk can also be
opened by using the remote control.

3 PANIC button

If the electronic key is inserted in starter switch, the
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked, and the trunk lid
cannot be opened with the remote control.
Central locking system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

4 Transmitter eye
5 Locking tab for mechanical key
25

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Instrument
cluster display

Driving

Central locking system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

P80.30-2139-26

6 Infrared receiver in driver’s door handle

P80.30-2140-26

7 Infrared receiver in front passenger door handle

Index

Locking and unlocking with remote control

If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote
control, neither door or trunk is opened, the electronic
key is not inserted in the starter switch, or the central
locking switch is not activated, the vehicle will
automatically lock.

Unlocking:
Press transmit button Œ. All turn signal lamps blink
once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked.
The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of
unlocking modes (see below):

Locking:
Press transmit button ‹ once. All turn signal lamps
blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked. If
they do not blink three times, a door or trunk is not
properly closed.

Selective unlocking mode –
Press transmit button Œ once to unlock driver’s door
and fuel filler flap.
Press transmit button Œ twice to unlock all doors,
fuel filler flap, and trunk.

Note:

Global unlocking mode –
Press transmit button Œ once to unlock all doors,
fuel filler flap, and trunk.

If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing
the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change
the batteries in the electronic main key (if ok, battery
check lamp in electronic main key will light briefly
when pressing transmit button) or to synchronize the
remote control, see pages 332 and 334.

Notes:
If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will
remain locked, see page 35.

Choosing global or selective mode on remote control

The presently active unlocking mode (selective or
global) can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle
with the remote control (see below for changing mode).

Central locking system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Press and hold transmit buttons ‹ and Œ
simultaneously for five seconds to reprogram the
remote control. Battery check lamp will blink two times
indicating the completed mode change.
27

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Central locking system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Opening the trunk

Important!

The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should
always make sure there is sufficient clearance.

Do not place remote control in trunk since trunk is
locked when the lid is closed if the vehicle is centrally
locked.

A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft. (1.75 m) is
required to open the trunk lid.
Press transmit button Š until trunk lid is open.

Notes:
If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will
remain locked, see page 35.

Index

Opening and closing windows and
sliding/pop-up roof from outside
(summer opening/convenience feature)

To interrupt closing procedure, release transmit button.
Ensure that all side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle.

Aim transmitter eye of remote control at the door
receiver.

Warning!
Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof
if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed
by the opening or closing procedure.

Summer opening:
The sliding/pop-up roof and all side windows can be
opened automatically.

In case the procedure causes potential danger, the
procedure can be immediately halted by releasing
the remote control button. To reverse direction of
movement press Œ for opening or ‹ for
closing.

Continue to press transmit button Œ after unlocking
the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to open
after approximately 1 second.

Note:

To interrupt opening procedure, release transmit
button.

If the windows and sliding/pop-up roof cannot be
operated automatically by pressing the transmit button
of the remote control then it may be necessary to change
the batteries in the electronic main key (if ok, battery
check lamp in electronic main key will light briefly
when transmitting), or to synchronize the remote
control, see page 332 and 334.

Convenience feature:
The sliding/pop-up roof and the side windows can be
closed.
Continue to press transmit button ‹ after locking
the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to close
after approximately 1 second.
Central locking system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

29
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Central locking system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Panic button

Note:
For operation in the USA only: This device complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
P80.35-2035-26

To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one
second. An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps
will operate for approximately 3 minutes.
To deactivate press button (1) again, or insert electronic
key in starter switch.

Mechanical keys
The mechanical keys work only in driver’s door, trunk,
and storage compartment locks.
Notes:
The mechanical key does not operate the central locking
system or antitheft alarm system.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with
the mechanical key.
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 335.

Index

Doors

4
5
2
3
1

1 Opening – pull handle

4 Individual door from inside:
Push lock button down to lock.

2 Unlocking driver’s door

5 Front door from inside:
Pull handle to unlock.

3 Locking driver’s door
Important!

When you lock the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the door lock button should move down.

The mechanical key does not operate the central locking
system or antitheft alarm system.

Central locking system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Each individual door must be locked with the respective
door lock button – the driver’s door can only be locked
when it is closed.
31

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Central locking system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

If the vehicle has previously been locked from the
outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the
alarm. When opening a front door while the central
locking system is in the:

To unlock, pull inside door handles or turn mechanical
key in driver’s door lock to position 2.

• selective unlocking mode, only that individual door
is unlocked. The remaining doors, the trunk and
fuel filler flap remain locked.

When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.

• global unlocking mode, all doors, the trunk and fuel
filler flap are unlocked.

To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.

Notes:
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system
the doors can be locked and unlocked individually.
To lock, push down lock buttons or turn mechanical key
in driver’s door lock to position 3. In addition lock the
trunk.

Rear doors can only be opened from inside by first
pulling up the door lock button.

Index

Central locking switch

If the vehicle was previously locked with the central
locking switch, while in the global remote control mode,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened
from the inside.
Notes:
If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote
control, the doors and trunk cannot be unlocked with
the central locking switch.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with
the central locking switch.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the
outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the
alarm. To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in
the starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.

P54.25-2417-26

1 Locking
2 Unlocking

Warning!

The central locking switch is located in the center
console.

The doors and trunk can only be locked with the central
locking switch, if both front doors are closed.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central
locking switch, while in the selective remote control
mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked.
Central locking system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

33
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Central locking system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Automatic central locking

Important!

With the automatic central locking system activated, the
doors and trunk are locked at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The fuel filler
flap remains unlocked.

When towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a
dynamometer test stand, please, note the following:

The automatic central locking function can be switched
on or off. See page 111 for “Individual settings”.
Notes:
If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch
after activating the automatic central locking, and
neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked
even at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more.
If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the
automatic central locking activated, the door will again
be automatically locked at speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.

With the automatic central locking activated and the
electronic key in starter switch position 2, the vehicle
doors will lock if the left front wheel as well as the right
rear wheel spin at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking. See page 111
for “Individual settings” - “VEHICLE”.
Emergency unlocking in case of accident
The doors unlock automatically a short time after an
accident in which an airbag or emergency tensioning
retractor deploys (this is intended to aid rescue and
exit).

Index

Trunk
The lock is located next to the recessed handle.
When the trunk is separately locked, it remains locked
when centrally unlocking the vehicle.
To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk,
lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave only
the electronic main key less its mechanical key with the
vehicle.
Notes:
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system
the trunk can be unlocked individually.
0 Neutral position

To unlock and open the trunk lid, turn mechanical key
to position 2, hold and push to open.

1 Separate locking of trunk – remove mechanical key
in this position.

The mechanical key does not operate the central locking
system or antitheft alarm system.

2 Unlocking

When unlocking the trunk with the mechanical key, the
exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound.

Important!

To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.

Do not place mechanical key inside trunk, since trunk is
locked again when closing the lid if the vehicle has been
previously centrally locked.

If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 335.
Central locking system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

35
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Central locking system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

P88.50-2128-26

Pull handle (arrow) to open the trunk lid.
The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should
always make sure there is sufficient clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft. (1.75 m) is
required to open the trunk lid.

Lower trunk lid using handle (1) and close it with hands
placed flat on trunk lid. Please remember to keep your
fingers out of the space between the lid and the vehicle.

Index

Trunk lid release switch

The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should
always make sure there is sufficient clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft. (1.75 m) is
required to open the trunk lid.
To open the trunk, the vehicle must be at standstill.
Press switch until trunk lid is open.
The indicator lamp in the switch remains on with trunk
lid open.
Notes:
The trunk can also be opened by using the remote
control. Press Š button.
The trunk lid cannot be opened by the switch or the
remote control when previously locked separately with
the mechanical key. To open, see page 35.

The switch is located on the driver’s door.

The trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid
release switch when the vehicle was previously locked
with the remote control. To unlock vehicle with the
remote control, see page 25.

Central locking system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

37
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Antitheft alarm system
Antitheft alarm system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

38
Operation:
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when
someone:
• opens a door,
• opens the trunk,
• opens the hood,
• attempts to raise the vehicle.

1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console
The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed
with the remote control by locking or unlocking the
vehicle.
The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately
10 seconds after locking the vehicle.
A blinking lamp (1) indicates that the alarm is armed.

The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the
activating element (a door, for example) is immediately
closed. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds,
an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele
Aid on page 220.
Notes:
When you unlock the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.

Index

Tow-away alarm

To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.

The switch is located in the center console.
1 Press to switch off tow-away alarm
2 Indicator lamp
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.

Tow-away alarm
Instruments
and controls

39
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tow-away alarm
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the
vehicle is immediately lowered. To cancel the alarm,
insert the electronic key in the starter switch or press
button Œ or ‹ on the electronic main key.
If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an
emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid
on page 220.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch
off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or
when parking on a surface subject to movement, such
as a ferry or auto train.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

40
To do so, turn electronic key in starter switch to
position 1 or 0, or remove electronic key from starter
switch. Press tow-away alarm switch (1). The indicator
lamp (2) illuminates briefly.
Exit vehicle, and lock vehicle with the electronic main
key.
The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the
vehicle is locked again with the electronic main key, at
which time it is automatically reactivated.

Index

Easy-entry/exit feature

When the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch
and the driver’s door is closed, the steering wheel and
the driver’s seat return to the last position set for it.

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering
wheel tilts upwards and the driver’s seat moves
rearwards.

Warning!

This allows easier entry into and exit from the vehicle
when the driver’s door is opened. However, the engine
must be turned off.

You must ensure that no one can become trapped
or injured by the moving steering wheel and the
driver’s seat with the easy-entry/exit feature
activated and you open the driver’s door or remove
the electronic key from the starter switch. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause serious personal
injury.

See page 121 for activating/deactivating the easy-entry/
exit feature.

Easy-entry/exit feature
Instruments
and controls

Operation

41
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Seats

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

42
Front seat adjustment
Warning!
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back
and seat belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
Never place hands under seat or near any moving
parts while a seat is being adjusted.

When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with the
driver’s or front passenger door open. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.
To operate the front power seat adjustment switches,
turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2 (with a front door open, the power seats can also be
operated with the electronic key removed or in starter
switch position 0).

Index

Power seat

We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following
order:
1 Seat, up/down
Press the switch (up/down direction) until
comfortable seating position with still sufficient
headroom is reached.
2 Seat adjustment, fore/aft
Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a
comfortable seating position is reached that still
allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal
safely. The position should be as far rearward as
possible, consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.
3 Seat cushion tilt
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until
your legs are lightly supported.

The switches are located in each front door.

4 Backrest tilt
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until
your arms are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.

Seats
Instruments
and controls

43
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Seats

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

44
5 Head restraint
The height of the head restraint is adjusted
automatically with the seat so that the back of the
head is supported approximately at ear level. Adjust
the head restraint using the switch to support the
back of your head approximately at ear level.
Only minor personal adjustments, as described
below, should then be required.
For exterior rear view mirrors, see page 81;
inside rear view mirror, see page 80;
steering wheel adjustment, see page 79.

Adjust the head restraint angle by hand. Push or pull
the head restraint in direction of arrow.
Storing seat positions:
The head restraint, steering wheel and exterior rear
view mirror position are stored together with the seat
position.
See page 85 for notes on the memory function. For
recalling a stored seat/head restraint/steering wheel/
and exterior rear view mirror position see page 86.

Index

Manual seat

We recommend to adjust the seat in the following order:
1 Fore/aft adjustment
Lift handle (1), slide seat to desired position and
allow handle to reengage. Check for proper
engagement before driving.
2 Seat cushion tilt
Turn handwheel (2) forward or backward.
3 Seat height adjustment
Press the switch (3) in the direction of the arrow
until your legs are lightly supported.
4 Backrest tilt
Press the switch (4) in the direction of the arrow
until your arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.

(Standard equipment on Model C 240)

Seats
Instruments
and controls

45
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Seats

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

5 Head restraint height
Raising:
Pull up on head restraint.
Lowering:
Push button (5) and push down on head restraint.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head
approximately at ear level. The head restraint
inclination can also be adjusted manually.

Head restraint inclination
Push or pull the head restraint in direction of arrow.

Index

Removal and installation of front seat head
restraints

Note:
Tilt the backrest rearward for easier removal and
installation of the head restraints.

Power seat

To remove:
Press switch (1) upwards and hold until the head
restraint is fully extended. Pull head restraint out.
To install:
Press switch (1) upwards and hold for about 5 seconds.
Press the head restraint down until it engages.
Adjust head restraint to the desired position.
Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Caution!

Adjust head restraint to support the back of the
head approximately at ear level.

Do not remove head restraints except when mounting
seat covers. Whenever restraints have been removed be
sure to reinstall them before driving.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help
reduce injuries during an accident.

Seats
Instruments
and controls

47
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Seats

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

48
Manual seat

Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the
head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help
reduce injuries during an accident.

To remove:
Pull head restraint to its highest position. Push
button (1) and pull out head restraint completely.
To install:
Insert head restraint and push it down to the stop. Push
button (1) and adjust head restraint to the desired
position.

Index

Multicontour seat (optional)

Some models may be equipped with driver’s
multicontour seat. These seats have movable seat
cushions and inflatable air cushions built into the
backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement and amount of backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously
varied with regulators (1, 2 and 3) after turning the
electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
The side bolsters of the backrest can be adjusted with
rocker switch (4):
• press to the left –
increase side support,
• press to the right –
decrease side support.

We recommend to adjust the multicontour seat in the
following order:

If the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is
retained in memory, and automatically adjusts the
cushion to this setting when the engine is restarted.

1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Side bolster adjustment

Seats
Instruments
and controls

49
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Seats

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

50
Heated seats (optional)

Press switch to turn on seat heater:
1 Normal seat heating mode. One indicator lamp in
the switch lights up.
2 Rapid seat heating mode. Both indicator lamps in
the switch light up. After approximately 5 minutes
in the rapid seat heating mode, the seat heater
automatically switches to normal operation and only
one indicator lamp will stay on.
Turning off seat heater:
If one indicator lamp is on, press upper half of switch.
If both indicator lamps are on, press lower half of
switch.

The front seat heaters can be switched on with the
electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2.
The switch is located in the center console.

If left on, the seat heater automatically turns off after
approximately 30 minutes of operation.

Index

Note:
When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large
amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the
seat heater longer than necessary.
The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too
many power consumers are switched on at the same
time, or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs,
the indicator lamp in the switch will blink (both
indicator lamps blink during rapid seat heating mode).
The seat heaters will switch on again automatically as
soon as sufficient voltage is available.
If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to
you, the seat heaters can be switched off.

Seats
Instruments
and controls

51
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Seats

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

52
Rear seat head restraints

Folding head restraints back with switch in the center
console:

Folding head restraints back in the rear passenger
compartment:

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.

Push lock button (1). The head restraints will fold
backward.

Folding head restraints back:
Press the symbol-side on the rocker switch to release
the head restraints. The head restraints will fold
backward for increased visibility.

Index

Place head restraints upright

Important!
For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head
restraints in the upright position when the rear seats
are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles
(e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the folding operation of
the head restraints.

Placing head restraints upright:
Pull the head restraint forward until it locks into
position.
Angle of head restraints:
The head restraint angle can be adjusted manually.

Seats
Instruments
and controls

53
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Seats

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

54
Head restraint height

Raising:
Pull up on head restraint.
Lowering:
Push button (2) and push down on head restraint.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head
approximately at ear level. The head restraint
inclination can also be adjusted manually.
Note:
The center rear seat head restraint cannot be adjusted
or removed.

Index

Seat belts and integrated restraint system

Warning!

Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts for all seats,
emergency tensioning retractors for all outboard seat
belts, dual front airbags, door mounted side impact
airbags, and head protective window curtain airbags.
Their protective functions are designed to complement
one another.

Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
side front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury will result.

Seat belts

According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in back seats
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, which is properly secured with
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Important!
Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require
seat belt use.
All states and provinces require use of child restraints
that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.

All child restraints systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap-shoulder belt.
For your safety and that of your passengers we strongly
recommend their use.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

55
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Warning!

Seat belt nonusage warning system

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in an upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.

With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, a
warning sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt
is not fastened.
Automatic comfort-fit seat belt:
An automatic comfort-fit feature for driver and front
passenger seat belt is activated when the electronic key
in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 2.
The retraction force of the inertia reel is reduced,
increasing the level of seat belt comfort.
Note:
For cleaning and care of the seat belts see page 345.

Index

Warning!

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position
your seat belt greatly increases your risk of
injuries and their likely severity in an accident.
You and your passengers should always wear seat
belts.

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there
are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in
the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate
seat belt.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be
considerably more severe without your seat belt
properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled,
you are much more likely to hit the interior of the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death
is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

57
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems
Fastening seat belts

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

58
The lap belt should be positioned as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen.
Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
Always make sure your passengers are properly
restrained – even those sitting in the rear.
Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder
portion up.
The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled
snug and checked for snugness immediately after
engaging it.

1 Latch plate
2 Buckle
3 Release button
Push latch plate (1) into buckle (2) until it clicks. Do not
twist the belt. A twisted seat belt may cause injury.

Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as
close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it
should not touch the neck). For this purpose, you can
adjust the height of the belt outlet.

Index

Operation of seat belts
The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during
sudden stops or when quickly pulling on the belt.
The locking function of the reel may be checked by
quickly pulling out the belt.
Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as
close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it
should not touch the neck).
Caution!
For safety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or seat back
into positions which could affect the correct seat belt
positioning.

4 Button for belt outlet height adjustment
To raise, slide belt outlet upward.

Unfastening of seat belts

To lower, press button (4) and slide belt outlet
downward.

Press release button (3) in the belt buckle (2).

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by
guiding the latch plate (1).

59
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems
Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY.
• Seat belts can only work when used properly.
Never wear seat belts in any other way than as
described in this section, as that could result
in serious injuries in case of an accident.
• Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all
times, because seat belts help reduce the
likelihood of and potential severity of injuries
in accidents, including rollovers. The
integrated restraint system includes “SRS”
(driver airbag, front passenger airbag, side
impact airbags, head protection window
curtain airbags for side windows), “ETR” (seat
belt emergency tensioning retractors), and
front seat knee bolsters. The system is
designed to enhance the protection offered to
properly belted occupants in certain frontal
(front airbags) and side (side impact and
window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

60
• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm,
against your neck or off your shoulder. In a
crash, your body would move too far forward.
That would increase the chance of head and
neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen, which
could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
• Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might
cause injuries.
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your
hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is
positioned across your abdomen, it could cause
serious injuries in a crash.
• Each seat belt should never be used for more
than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or
other objects.
• Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash,
you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to
manage impact forces. The twisted belt against
your body could cause injuries.

Index

• Pregnant women should also use a lapshoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be
positioned as low as possible on the hips to
avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.

According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in the back
seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or
child restraint system, which is properly secured
with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

• Never place your feet on the instrument panel
or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the
floor in front of the seat.

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.

Warning!

Children too big for child restraint systems must
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning.

USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury will result.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

61
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system

Warning!

Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed
for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for
use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
With the special child seat properly installed, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy.

The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will
ONLY work with a special child seat designed to
operate with it. It will not work with child seats
which are not BabySmartTM compatible.

The ü indicator lamp located in the center console
will be illuminated, except with electronic key removed
or in starter switch position 0. The system does not
deactivate the door mounted side impact airbag.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat
installed
After turning electronic key in starter switch to
position 1 or 2, the ü indicator lamp located in the
center console comes on for approximately 6 seconds
and then extinguishes.

Never place anything between seat cushion and
child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the
effectiveness of the deactivation system.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the ü indicator lamp remains illuminated.
Please be sure to check the indicator every time
you use the special system child seat. Should the
light go out while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. If the light remains out, do not
use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.

If the indicator lamp should not come on or is
continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating
any child on the front passenger seat. See page 273 for
notes on the ü indicator lamp.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

Index

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Seat belt fastened
• first threshold exceeded: ETR activates

Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts.
Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were
designed to operate, and do not afford any protection
whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not
designed to deploy.

• second threshold exceeded: airbag also activates
Seat belt not fastened
Front seats:
• first threshold exceeded: airbag activates, not ETR

The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to
activate either the emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)
or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the
direction and severity of the impact exceeding the
preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened.

Rear outer seats:
• first threshold exceeded: ETR activates
Driver and front passenger and rear outer seat systems
operate independently of each other.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

63
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)
The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are
equipped with emergency tensioning retractors. These
tensioning retractors are located in each belt’s inertia
reel and become operationally ready with the electronic
key in starter switch position 1 or 2.
The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to
activate only when the seat belts are fastened during
frontal impacts exceeding the first threshold of the SRS
and in rear impacts exceeding a preset severity level.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

64
They remove slack from the belts in such a way that the
seat belts fit more snugly against the body restricting its
forward movement as much as possible.
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, rollovers, certain side impacts, or other accidents without
sufficient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency
tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver
and passengers will then be protected by the fastened
seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner.

Index

Airbags

1 Driver airbag

Front airbags

2 Front passenger airbag
The most effective occupant restraint system yet
developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt.
In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat
belt can be further enhanced by an airbag.
In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver
and front passenger airbags can provide increased
protection for the driver and front passenger in certain
frontal impacts exceeding preset thresholds.
Side impact and head protection window curtain airbags
can provide increased protection to belted occupants on
the impacted side of the vehicle in side impacts
exceeding its preset threshold.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is
verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument
cluster when turning the electronic key in starter switch
to position 1 or 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go
out after approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes
out, the system continues to monitor the components
and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a
malfunction by coming on again. If the lamp does not

P91.60-2252-27

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

65
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems
come on at all or if it fails to extinguish after
approximately 4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter,
a malfunction in the system has been detected.
The following system components are monitored or
undergo a self-check: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition
circuits, front seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning
retractors, seat sensor.
Initially, when the electronic key is turned from starter
switch position 0 to position 1 or 2, malfunctions in the
crash sensor are detected and indicated (the “SRS”
indicator lamp stays on longer than 4 seconds or does
not come on).
Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

66
In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp has
gone out following the initial check, interruptions or
short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the
driver and front passenger seat belt buckle harnesses,
and low voltage in the entire system are detected and
indicated.
Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which could
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also
result in injury.
Note:
See page 271 for information on the supplemental
restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp.

Index

Note:

The driver and passenger front airbags are designed to
activate only in certain frontal impacts exceeding a
preset threshold. The front passenger airbag deploys
only if the front passenger seat is occupied and the
ü indicator lamp in the center console is not
illuminated.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to
the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in
that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to
deploy in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold.

67
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems
Side impact airbags, window curtain airbags

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

68
Side impact airbags
The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in
certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only
the side impact airbags on the impacted side of the
vehicle deploy.
The side impact airbag for the front passenger deploys
only if the front passenger seat is occupied.
Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a
properly positioned and fastened seat belt.
Note:
Heavy objects on front passenger seat can cause the
front passenger side impact airbag to deploy in a crash.

3 Side impact airbags
4 Window curtain airbags

Window curtain airbag
The head protection window curtain airbags afford
greater protection against injuries to the head and
upper body. They fill up in the area between the A and
C pillars (see arrows) between the side windows and an
occupant’s head.

Index

Important!

The window curtain airbags are designed to activate
only in certain side impacts exceeding a preset
threshold. Only the head protection window curtain
airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys.

Airbags are designed to activate only in certain
frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact
and head protection window curtain airbags)
impacts which exceed preset thresholds.
Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient
severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will
they provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear their
seat belts, otherwise it is not possible for the airbags
to provide their supplemental protection.
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts,
roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or
other accidents, the airbags will not be activated.
The driver and passengers will then be protected by
the fastened seat belts.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

69
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems
Warning!
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of
injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or
side (side impact and head protection window
curtain airbags) impacts which may cause
significant injuries, however, no system available
today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a
small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust,
however, is neither injurious to your health, nor
does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might
cause some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing
difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the
airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or door.
The service life of the airbags extends to the date
indicated on the label located on the driver side
door latch post. To provide continued reliability
after that date, they should be inspected by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at that time and
replaced when necessary.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

70
Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags
which are designed to activate in certain impacts
exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential
and severity of injury. It is important to your safety
and that of your passenger that you replace deployed
airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to
ensure the vehicle will continue to provide crash
protection for occupants.
Warning!
To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags
inflate, it is very important for the driver and front
passenger to always be in a properly seated
position and to wear your seat belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a collision
always be in normal seated position with your back
against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and
ensure that it is properly positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed
and force, a proper seating and hands on steering
wheel position will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the airbag. Occupants who are
unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag
can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:

Index

• Sit properly belted in an upright position with
your back against the backrest.

• Occupants, especially children, should never
lean their heads in the area of the door where
the side airbag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the airbag be
triggered.

• Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of
vehicle controls. The distance from the center
of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the
airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at
least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of
adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If
you have any problems, please see your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

• Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized Baby SmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with the
BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to
deactivate the passenger side front airbag
when it is properly installed. Otherwise they
will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in
a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
can result.

• Do not lean with your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
• Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel
rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim
can increase the risk and potential severity of
hand/arm injury when driver front airbag
inflates.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in
severe injuries to you or other occupants.

• Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

71
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency
tensioning retractor and airbag
Warning!

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

72
• Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
• Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.

• Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced and
their anchoring points must also be checked.
Use only belts installed or supplied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

• Do not use handles above doors for placing
such items as coat hangers etc.

• Airbags and “ETR’s” are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or
emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) that was
activated must be replaced.

• Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can lead to
possible injury through an unintended
activation of the “SRS”.

• No modifications of any kind may be made to
any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This
includes changing or removing any component
or part of the “SRS”, the installation of
additional trim material, badges etc. over the
steering wheel hub, front passenger airbag
cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims,
and installation of additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near “SRS”
components and wiring. Keep area between
airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc).

• In addition, through improper work there is a
risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment. Work
on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

• An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has
inflated. Do not touch.

Index

• For your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the airbag unit or
emergency tensioning retractor, our safety
instructions must be followed. These
instructions are available from your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Infant and child restraint systems

• Given the considerable deployment speed and
the textile structure of the airbags, there is the
possibility of abrasions or other injuries
resulting from airbag deployment.

To activate, pull shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting
sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt
retractor is activated. The belt is now locked.

We recommend all infants and children be properly
restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All
lap-shoulder belts except the driver seat belt have
special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child
restraints.

To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt
retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in
the usual manner.

When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give
notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with
an “SRS” by alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.

Note:
For child seats with mounting fittings for tether
anchorages refer to page 75 (installation of infant and
child restraint systems).
Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is
in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will
be deactivated.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

73
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Important!

Warning!

The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in
all 50 states and all Canadian provinces.

Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury can result.

Infants and small children should be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system properly
secured by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of
compliance with this standard can be found on the
instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure
to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels affixed to the
inside of the vehicle and to infant or child restraints.

Index

Installation of infant and child restraint systems

Infants and small children should never share a
seat belt with another occupant. During an
accident, they could be crushed between the
occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems must
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to
the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly
without one.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it
from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to
prevent the child restraint from becoming a
projectile in the event of an accident.

This vehicle is provided with tether anchorages for a top
tether strap at each of the rear seating positions.
Prior to installing a tether strap, remove cover (1) from
anchorage ring (2) and store in a convenient place (e.g.
glove box).

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

75
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

76
Child seat mounts

2
1
P91.12-2233-26

To secure a tether strap to the anchorage, securely
fasten the hook (3), which is part of the tether strap, to
the anchorage ring (2). For safety, please make sure that
the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.

This vehicle is provided with two mounts (at each of the
outer rear seats) for the installation of a child seat
having the matching mounting fittings. The mounts can
be folded back between the seat cushion and the
backrest.

After removing the tether strap, reinstall the cover (1).

To install a child seat, the mounts (1) must be folded
forward until they lock in place. To do so, grip inner side
of mounts and fold forward. Install child seat according
to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Index

Steering wheel adjustment (manual)

To fold mounts (1) back, press down button (2) on each
mount and return mount into its catch.
Note:
With a child seat installed in the left rear seat, the seat
belt for the center seat occupied by a passenger must
operate freely. Guide seat belt between its seat cushion
mount and backrest mount along outside of right side
child seat mount.

Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the adjustment locked could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Restraint systems
Instruments
and controls

Operation

77
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Restraint systems

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Unlocking:

Important!

Pull handle (1) out to its stop.

Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked
the steering column.

Adjusting:
Move steering wheel to the desired position.
Locking:
Push handle (1) in until it engages.

See “STEERING WH. ADJUST” on page 292 for
malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction
display.

Index

Steering wheel adjustment (electrical)
Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could
cause the driver to lose the control of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch and lock your
vehicle.
The steering wheel adjustment feature can also be
operated with the driver’s door open. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.

The switch is located on the driver’s door.
1 Steering column, lengthen or shorten column

To adjust the steering wheel position, turn the electronic
key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. With the driver’s
door open, the steering wheel can also be operated with
the electronic key removed or in starter switch
position 0.

Move the switch to the front or rear.
2 Steering column, height
Move the switch up or down.
Note:
The steering wheel adjustment can be stored together
with the seat and exterior mirror adjustment.
See page 85 for notes on the memory function.

Steering wheel adjustment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

79
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Rear view mirrors

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Rear view mirrors

Note:

Inside rear view mirror

The automatic antiglare function does not react, if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the
mirror.

Manually adjust the mirror.
Rear view mirror, automatic antiglare

Warning!

Antiglare mode:
With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the
mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in
light sensitivity.

In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass
breaks.

With the gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the
interior light switched on, the mirror brightness does
not respond to changes in light sensitivity.

Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the
liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing,
or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.

Index

Exterior mirror adjustment

Exterior rear view mirrors

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
Push button to select mirror to be adjusted:
Driver’s side – Push button (1).
Passenger side – Push button (2).
P

Push the adjustment button (3) up, down, left or right
according to the setting desired.

Auto

Notes:
The exterior rear view mirrors have electrically heated
glass. The heater switches on automatically, depending
on outside temperature.
The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch.
The memory button (4) is located on the driver’s door.

If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its
normal position, it must be repositioned by applying
firm pressure until it snaps into place.

Warning!

Storing mirror positions in memory

Exercise care when using the passenger side
exterior mirror. The mirror surface is convex
(outwardly curved surface for a wider field of
view). Objects in mirror are closer than they
appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

The exterior rear view mirror positions are stored in
memory with the seat/steering wheel adjustment and
can be recalled when necessary. See page 85 for notes
on the memory function.

Rear view mirrors
Instruments
and controls

Operation

81
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Rear view mirrors
Parking position exterior mirror
(only vehicles with power seats)
The passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted and
programmed to assist the driver during parking
maneuvers (e.g. to observe the curb or other objects
close to the vehicle).
With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, and
the exterior rear view mirror switch in the passenger
side position, the passenger side mirror will be turned
downward when placing the gear selector lever in “R”
reverse.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

82
Note:
The mirror adjustment is only active if you select “ON”
in the menu “MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING”.
Refer to “CONVENIENCE” under individual settings, see
page 121.
The mirror position can now be adjusted as desired.
At speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), upon
shifting gear selector lever from “R” Reverse, or upon
pressing the driver’s side mirror button, the passenger
side mirror will return to its previous position.

Index

Note:

To store passenger mirror parking position:

One stored parking position is available for each of the
two electronic main keys.

1. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to
position 1 or 2.

This is only possible if you select “ON” in the menu
“SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT”. Refer to
“CONVENIENCE” under individual settings, see
page 121.

The vehicle must be stationary.
2. Select passenger side mirror and adjust the mirror
to view the curb.
3. Push the memory button “M” (4).
4. Within 3 seconds push bottom of adjustment
button (3).
The mirror should not move.
Repeat the memory procedure if the mirror moves.
5. Select driver side mirror. The passenger side mirror
will return to its previous position.

Rear view mirrors
Instruments
and controls

Operation

83
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Rear view mirrors

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Driver’s side exterior mirror, antiglare mode

Warning!

Antiglare mode:
With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the
mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in
light sensitivity.

In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass
breaks.

With the gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the
interior light switched on, the mirror brightness does
not respond to changes in light sensitivity.

Note:
The automatic antiglare function does not react, if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the
mirror.

Important!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle
paint finish can only be completely removed while in
their liquid state, by applying plenty of water.

Index

Memory function

Together with the driver’s seat position you can store
the positions for steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors.
For the front passenger you can store the seat position.
Three stored positions for the driver’s seat are available
for each of the two electronic main keys.

The memory and stored position buttons are located on
the doors.
1 Memory button, used to store selected positions
which can be retrieved by pressing
2 Stored position button
Turn to position “1”, “2”, or “3”

Memory function
Instruments
and controls

85
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Memory function

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Storing positions into memory:

Recalling positions from memory:

With the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2
or with the relevant door open and the electronic key
inserted in the starter switch.

To recall a seat /steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirror position, turn button (2) to selected memory
position and press to recall.

Adjust the seat to the desired position.

The seat/ steering wheel and exterior rear view mirror
movement stops when the button is released.

Driver’s seat:
You can also adjust the steering wheel and the exterior
mirrors electrically for the driver’s seat. See page 81 for
exterior mirror adjustment and page 79 for steering
wheel adjustment.
Turn button (2) to selected memory position.
Push memory button (1), release and push the position
button (2) within 3 seconds.

Caution!
Do not operate the power seats using the memory
button if the backrest is in an excessively reclined
position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear
seats.
First move backrest to an upright position.

Index

Important!

Warning!

Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check
and adjust if necessary the seat height, seat position
fore and aft, and backrest angle to insure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should
also be adjusted for proper height. See also airbag
section for proper seat positioning.

In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure
adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the
inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted
for adequate rearward vision.

Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be
seated in a properly secured restraint system that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view
mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts
should be done before the vehicle is put into motion.

Memory function
Instruments
and controls

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.

87
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints
88

Car care

Technical
data

Index

11 High beam headlamp indicator,
exterior lamp switch, see page 130 and
combination switch, see page 134.

1 Knob for instrument cluster illumination,
see page 90
Reset knob for trip odometer, see page 91 and
individual settings, see page 111

12 Multifunction display, see page 92
Instrument cluster display, see page 274

2 Tachometer

13 Trip odometer, see page 91 and 96

3 Antilock brake system (ABS) malfunction indicator
lamp, see page 272

14 Main odometer, see page 96

4 Brake fluid low or parking brake engaged,
see page 278

15 Display for program mode and gear range
indicators, page 237

5 Speedometer

16 Malfunction/warning message memory,
see page 109

6 Left turn signal indicator lamp, see combination
switch on page 134

17 Outside temperature indicator, see page 91

7 Electronic stability program (ESP) warning lamp,
system is adjusting to road conditions, see page 273

18 Digital clock
To set the time, see individual settings on page 111

8 Indicator lamp without function. It illuminates with
the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It
should go out when the engine is running.

19 Right turn signal indicator lamp, see combination
switch on page 134
20 Fasten seat belts, see page 273

9 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp,
see page 268

21 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) malfunction
indicator lamp, see page 271

10 High beam headlamp indicator,
see exterior lamp switch, page 130, and
combination switch, see page 134
Instrument cluster
Instruments
and controls

Operation

22 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement
warning lamp, see page 271
89

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Instrument cluster
Activating instrument cluster display
The instrument cluster is activated by:
• Opening the door1.
• Pressing button (1) on the instrument cluster1.
• Turning the electronic key in starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
• Switching on the exterior lamps.
1 The instrument cluster is activated for approximately 30 seconds.

Instrument cluster illumination
The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or
brightened automatically to suit daylight lighting
conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also be
adjusted when the vehicle’s exterior lamps are switched
on.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

90
Display illumination, changing basic settings for driving
at dusk or in darkness:
Rotate adjusting knob (1) clockwise – instrument lamp
intensity increases.
Rotate adjusting knob (1) counterclockwise –
instrument lamp intensity decreases.
Note:
It is not possible to select a basic brightness setting in
daylight – the intensity is adjusted automatically.

Index

Trip odometer (13)

Outside temperature indicator (17)

To reset to “0” miles/km:
Warning!

Activate the instrument cluster if it is not already
activated, see page 90.

The outside temperature indicator is not designed
to serve as an Ice-Warning Device and is therefore
unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated
temperatures just above the freezing point do not
guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.

Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer
appears if it is not displayed. See page 96.
Press button (1) on the instrument cluster, see page 90.

The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper
area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by
road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature
can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer
placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).

Tachometer (2)
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive
engine speed.
Avoid this engine speed, as it may result in serious
engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Adaption to ambient temperature takes place in steps
and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stopand-go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of
temperature change.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted
if the engine is operated within the red marking.

Note:
The temperature indicator display can be set to read out
in either Fahrenheit or Celsius. See page 111.

Instrument cluster
Instruments
and controls

Operation

91
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display

P54.30-3841-29

Index

3 Navigation system, see page 106

Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, you may use
the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to call
up, control and set the following systems in the
multifunction display:

4 Malfunction message memory, see page 109
5 Individual settings, see page 111
6 Trip computer, see page 107

1 Trip odometer and main odometer, see page 91 and
page 96

After start
After reset
Fuel tank content

Flexible service system (FSS), see page 125
Vehicle speed, see page 96
Coolant temperature gauge, see page 124
Engine oil level indicator, see page 128

7 Telephone, see page 101
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
required system is displayed.

2 Audio systems, see page 98
Radio, see page 98
CD player, see page 99
Cassette player, see page 100

The display advances by one system each time the
button is pressed.
You may call up additional displays within some of these
categories by pressing the j or k button.

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

93
Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Warning!

Note:

A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/
her primary focus when driving.

The displays in the multifunction display can be set to
German, English, French, Italian or Spanish language.
See the “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” individual settings
on page 111 for instructions on changing the language
setting.

For your safety and the safety of others, selecting
features through the multifunction steering wheel
should only be done by the driver when traffic and
road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Programming individual settings in the system can
only be made while the vehicle is at standstill.

The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player,
cassette player) will appear in English, regardless of the
language selected.

Index

Press button:
3 è for next system
4 ÿ for previous system
5 j for next display in system
6 k for previous display in system
7 æ to increase the volume, see page 123
8 ç to decrease the volume, see page 123
9 í to dial a telephone number, see page 101
10 ì to end a call
See page 101 for telephone and page 105 for
instructions on answering an incoming call.
11 Horn pad
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
required system is displayed.

P46.10-2184-27

The display advances by one system each time the
button is pressed.

1 Multifunction display
2 Multifunction steering wheel

You may call up additional displays in some systems by
pressing the j or k button.

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

95
Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Trip-/main odometer, FSS, coolant temperature,
vehicle speed, engine oil level indicator

P54.30-3638-29

Index

Press è or ÿ button repeatedly until the trip
odometer and main odometer display (1) appears.

1 Trip odometer and main odometer
See page 91 for instructions on resetting the trip
odometer.

Press the j or k button repeatedly until the
required display (2, 3, 4, 5, 1) appears.

2 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 124

Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.

3 Vehicle speed if “SPEED DISP.” is selected in
individual settings under “INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER”, refer to page 113
Outside temperature if “OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE”
is selected in Individual settings under
“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”, see page 113
4 FSS (Flexible service system), see page 125
5 Engine oil level indicator, see page 128

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

97
Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Audio systems

1 Audio system is switched off.

Radio

2 The radio is switched on.
3 Wave band setting and memory location number,
where appropriate.
4 Station name setting or station frequency.
5 This only appears when “MEMORY” rather than
“FREQUENCY” has been selected in the Individual
settings. See page 119.
The radio must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Press button j or k repeatedly until the required
station or frequency is displayed.
Use the j of k button to select a stored station or
station frequency. This depends on the selection made
in the “PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODUS” setting
menu. See individual settings, page 119.
P54.30-3634-27

Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.

Index

CD player

1 Radio system is switched off.
2 The CD player is switched on.
3 The number of the CD currently playing is displayed
if you are using a CD changer.
4 Track number.
“TITLE” appears on vehicles with COMAND system.
“TRACK” appears on vehicles with audio system.
The radio must be switched on.
The CD player must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the
required track number (4) is displayed.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Note:

P54.30-3635-27

To select a CD from the magazine, press a number on
the audio system or the (optional) COMAND system key
pad located in the center dashboard.

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

99
Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

100

Cassette player

1 Audio system is switched off.
2 The cassette player is switched on.
3 Side being played.
The radio must be switched on.
The cassette player must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Pressing the j button fast forward on to the next
track.
Pressing the k button rewinds the cassette to the
beginning of the current track.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Notes:

P54.30-3639-27

To select the reverse side of the tape, press button below
track number on the audio system display, or enter
request on the (optional) COMAND system located in
the center dashboard.

Index

Telephone

1 The telephone is switched off.

Telephone book

2 The vehicle is currently outside the transmitter or
receiver range.
3 The telephone is ready for use.
4 Name selected from the telephone book.
5 Number for the name selected. The dialing
commences.
6 Dialing is completed. The name is displayed. The
display remains for the duration of the call.
7 Duration of call
8 Memory location number
9 Signal strength (in top right corner):
Vehicles with audio system:
the higher the number, the stronger the signal
received from the net.
Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner):
the higher the number of bars, the stronger the
signal received from the net.
P54.30-3640-27

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

101

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
The telephone must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
display (3) appears. See the separate telephone
instructions manual.
Pressing j or k “browses” alphabetically forward
or backward through the telephone book, providing it
was previously downloaded. See telephone operator’s
manual for details concerning downloading. Pressing
button j or k for longer than a second “browses”
rapidly through the telephone book. The name selected
appears in the display.
Note:
Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call.
The procedure is cancelled and display (4) appears.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

102
Press the í button when the name you require
appears in the display (4). The telephone number (5) is
dialed.
The name will be displayed when dialing is completed.
Display (6) remains for the duration of the call.
Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (3)
appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.

Index

Redialing

1 The telephone is ready for use.
2 Number or name stored in the redial memory.
3 Number in the redial memory — redialing has
commenced.
4 Dialing is complete and the name stored in the
telephone book is displayed or the number dialed
will remain displayed if no name has been store. The
display remains for the duration of the call.
5 Signal strength:
Vehicles with audio system (in top right corner):
the higher the number, the stronger the signal
received from the net.
Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner):
the higher the number of bars, the stronger the
signal received from the net.
6 Memory location numbers — the 10 most recently
dialed numbers are stored.
L0, most recently dialed number,
L1 to L9, previously dialed numbers.
P54.30-3641-27

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

7 Duration of call.

103

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
The telephone must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
display (1) appears.
Pressing the í button activates the redial memory
and the most recently dialed number is displayed.
Pressing the j or k button “browses” forward or
backward through the redial memory. The number
selected appears in the display.
Note:
Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call.
The procedure is cancelled and display (1) appears.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

104
Press the í button when the required number or
name appears in the display (2).
The telephone number (3) is dialed.
Once dialing is complete the name (4) is displayed if the
name is stored in the telephone book; failing that the
number dialed will remain displayed. The display
remains for the duration of the call.
Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (1)
appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.

Index

Press the í button to answer the call.

Incoming call

Press the ì button to hang up or if you do not wish
to answer the incoming call.

The telephone must be switched on.
1 “CALL” — you are being called.
2 Signal strength:
Vehicles with audio system (in top right corner):
the higher the number, the stronger the phone
signal received by the antenna.
Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner):
the higher the number of bars, the stronger the
phone signal received by the antenna.

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

105

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

106

Navigation system

1 The navigation system is switched off.
2 The navigation system is switched on but no
destination has been specified.
3 The navigation system is switched on and
destination guidance is active.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
required system is displayed.
See the separate COMAND (Cockpit Management and
Data System) operator’s manual for notes on the
navigation system.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.

P54.30-3643-27

Index

Trip computer

1 “AFTER START” — short distance memory
2 “AFTER RESET” — long distance memory
3 Estimated range remaining
4 Distance covered “AFTER START” or
“AFTER RESET”
5 Elapsed time “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET”
6 Average speed “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET”
7 Average fuel consumption “AFTER START” or
“AFTER RESET”
Press the button è or ÿ repeatedly until the
display (1, 2 or 3) appears.
Press the j or k button until the “AFTER START”
short distance memory (1), the “AFTER RESET” long
distance memory (2) or fuel tank contents and
estimated range remaining indicator (3) appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Note:
The display (1) always appears the next time the trip
computer is called up.

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

107

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
To reset the short “AFTER START” (1) or long
“AFTER RESET” distance memory (2):
Call up the relevant display (1 or 2) using the j or
k button and press the reset knob on the instrument
cluster, see page 88, until the values are reset to “0”.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

108
Note:
The “AFTER START” trip odometer reading is
automatically reset after four hours of electronic key not
being in starter switch position 1 or 2.

Index

Malfunction/warning message memory

1 There are no messages stored in the system.
2 Number of messages stored in the system.
3 There are messages stored in the system.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
message memory (1 or 2) is displayed.
Press the j or k button if display (2) appears.
The stored messages will now be displayed in order.
See page 274 for malfunction and warning messages.
Display (2) will reappear after you have scanned all the
malfunction and warning messages.
Should any malfunction or warning messages be stored
while driving, they will reappear in the display (2) when
the electronic key is in starter switch position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
The malfunction or warning messages will now be
displayed for approximately 5 seconds each.
Pressing the reset knob on the instrument cluster
(see page 88) displays the malfunction and warning
messages once more.

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

109

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
The message memory will be cleared when the
electronic key is turned in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2. Should any subsequent faults occur,
they will be displayed in the message memory.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

110
Important!
Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated
for certain systems and displayed to a low level of detail.
The malfunction and warning messages are simply a
reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the driver’s responsibility to
maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks performed on
the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages. See page 274, for malfunction and
warning messages.

Index

Individual settings

1 Preliminary display of the individual settings.
2 “SETTINGS” – the requested menu can be called up
in this options menu:
“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”, see page 113.
“LIGHTING”, see page 117.
“VEHICLE”, see page 119.
“CONVENIENCE”, see page 121.
The four menus contain additional submenus.
Individual settings can be selected in these
submenus.
3 See below for instructions on returning the setting
menus to the factory settings.
4 Acknowledgment.
Note:
The displayed menu “SETTINGS” depends on the
equipment of the vehicle.
P54.30-3645-27

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

111

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

112
To return menu “SETTINGS” (2) to its factory
setting:

Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.

• Call up the individual setting preliminary
display (1) or display (2).

Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection
marker in the setting menu.

• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster
(see page 88) for approximately 3 seconds.
Display (3) will appear.

“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”, see page 113.
“LIGHTING”, see page 117.
“VEHICLE”, see page 119.
“CONVENIENCE”, see page 121
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Notes:
These settings may only be performed with the vehicle
at standstill and with the electronic key in starter switch
position 1 or 2.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear if you speed up.
The setting menu previously called up will reappear
when the vehicle stops, providing no other system has
been called up in the meantime.

• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The menu “SETTINGS” is reset to factory
settings, acknowledged by display (4).
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear if you do not press the reset knob on the
instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.

Index

“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”

P54.30-3646-29

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

113

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
2 “SETTINGS” – the menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”
can be called up in this options menu.
Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction
steering wheel controls the selection marker.
3 “SET TIME” - “HOURS”1
4 “SET TIME” - “MINUTES”1
5 “12/24 O’CLOCK” – the unit set is displayed in the
instrument cluster display
6 “TEMP. INDICATOR” – the unit set is displayed in
the outside temperature display, in the instrument
cluster and in the automatic air conditioner display.
7 “DISPLAY VALUES IN” – the unit set is displayed in
the multifunction display (except speedometer).
8 “TEXT” – sets the language used in the
multifunction display
1 Only vehicles without COMAND.
Vehicles with COMAND, see separate operator’s manual.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

114
9 “SELECT DISPLAY” – The selection “SPEED DISP.”
respectively “OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE” is
permanently displayed in the multifunction display.
“SPEED DISP.” can be used to display, for instance,
the present speed in km/h if the setting menu (7)
“DISPLAY VALUES IN” is set to indicate miles.
10 See page 116 for instructions on returning the
setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” to the
factory setting.
11 Acknowledgment.
Note:
Vehicles with COMAND:
For setting clock and speedometer units, see separate
COMAND operator’s manual.

Index

Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.

Press the j or k button until the required
display (3 to 9) is displayed.

Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.

Pressing the æ or ç button sets the time in
setting menus (3, 4) and controls the selection marker
in the setting menus (5 to 9).

Press button æ or ç until the menu
“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” is selected by the selection
marker.

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

The settings made are stored and applied immediately.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the
next or previous system.

115

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
To return menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” (5 to 9) to
its factory setting:
• Call up one of the setting menus(3 to 9).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see
page 88, for approximately 3 seconds. Display (10)
will appear.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

116
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” is reset
to factory settings, acknowledged by display (11).
The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will
appear if you do not press the reset knob on the
instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.

Index

“LIGHTING”

P54.30-3647-29

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

117

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up
the menu “LIGHTING”.
Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction
steering wheel controls the selection marker.
3 “LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE”1,
see page 131.
4 “LOCATOR LIGHTING”, see page 133.
5 “HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF”, see “Night
security illumination” on page 132.
6 “INT. ILLUMINATION DELAYED SWITCH-OFF”, see
“Interior lighting” on page 189.
7 Returning the setting menu “LIGHTING” to the
factory setting.
8 Acknowledgment.
1 Except Canada

Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.
Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

118
Press button æ or ç until the menu “LIGHTING”
is selected by the selection marker.
Press the j or k button until the required
display (3 to 6) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç
button controls the selection marker. The settings made
are stored and applied immediately.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the
next or previous system.
To return menu “LIGHTING” (3 to 6) to its factory
setting:
• Call up menu (3 to 6).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see
page 88) in the instrument cluster for approximately
3 seconds. Display (7) will appear.
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The menu “LIGHTING” is reset to factory
settings, acknowledged by display (8).
The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will
appear if you do not press the reset knob on the
instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.

Index

“VEHICLE” (audio and central locking system)

P54.30-3636-29

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

119

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up
the menu “VEHICLE”.
Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction
steering wheel controls the selection marker.
3 “PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE”
– radio adjustment “STATION SEARCH”: use
the j or k button to select a frequency.
– radio adjustment “MEMORY”: use the j
or k button to select a stored station (preset
memory).
4 “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK”, see automatic central
locking on page 34.
5 Returning the setting menu “VEHICLE” to the
factory setting.
6 Acknowledgment.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.
Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.
Press button æ or ç until the menu “VEHICLE” is
selected by the selection marker.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

120
Press the j or k button until the required
display (3 to 4) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç
button controls the selection marker. The settings made
are stored and applied immediately.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the
next or previous system.
To return menu “VEHICLE” (3 and 4) to its factory
setting:
• Call up menu (3 or 4).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see
page 88) in the instrument cluster for approximately
3 seconds. Display (5) will appear.
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The menu “VEHICLE” is reset to factory
settings, acknowledged by display (6).
The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will
appear if you do not press the knob for instrument
cluster illumination within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.

Index

“CONVENIENCE” (only vehicles with power seats)

P54.30-3648-29

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

121

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up
the menu “CONVENIENCE”.
Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction
steering wheel controls the selection marker.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

122
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.
Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.

3 “EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE”, see page 41.

Press button æ or ç until the menu
“CONVENIENCE” is selected by the selection marker.

4 “SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT”
if setting “ON” is selected, all settings selected in
the individual setting can be stored key-dependent
in memory. Memory function, see page 85.

Press the j or k button until the required
display (3 to 5) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç
button controls the selection marker. The settings made
are stored and applied immediately.

5 “MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING” – the
passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted and
programmed to assist the driver during parking
maneuvers, see page 82.

The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the
next or previous system.

6 Returning the setting menu “CONVENIENCE” to the
factory setting.
7 Acknowledgment.

Index

Setting the audio volume

To return menu “CONVENIENCE” (3 to 5) to its
factory setting:

You can only adjust the volume of the system currently
in use.

• Call up menu (3 to 5).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see
page 88, in the instrument cluster for approximately
3 seconds. Display (6) will appear.

Vehicles with COMAND system:
The volume setting for each system (audio, telephone,
navigation and voice recognition system) is stored
separately.

• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The menu “CONVENIENCE” is reset to
factory settings, acknowledged by display (7).
The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will
appear if you do not press the reset knob on the
instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.

Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Setting button:
æ increases the volume.
ç reduces the volume.

123

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Flexible service system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

124

Coolant temperature gauge

During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 120 °C.
The engine should not be operated with the coolant
temperature above 120°C. Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
• Driving when your engine is badly overheated
can cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
P54.30-3605-26

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.

• Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.

Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by
pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel. See page 96.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.

Press button j or k until the coolant
temperature gauge appears.

Note:
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger a warning in the
multifunction display. See page 282.

Index

Flexible service system (FSS)
(service indicator)

The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds
when turning the electronic key in starter switch to
position 2, or while driving when reaching the service
warning threshold.
The symbols and messages indicate the type of service
to be performed:
9 Service A
½ Service B
One of the following messages will appear in the display
(e.g. Service A):
“SERVICE A – IN xx DAYS”
“SERVICE A – IN xx MILES” (Canada: KM)
“SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS”
“SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx MILES” (Canada: KM)
“SERVICE A – DUE NOW”

P54.30-3606-26

The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is
directly related to the operating conditions of the
vehicle.

The next service due date is displayed either in days or
in miles, depending on your driving style.

The symbol 9 or ½ appears together with a
message in the multifunction indicator prior to the next
suggested service.

Once the suggested service term has passed, the symbol
and message appear for approximately 30 seconds and
a signal sounds every time when turning the electronic
key in starter switch to position 2.

Depending on operating conditions throughout the year,
the next service is calculated and displayed in days or
distance remaining.
Flexible service system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

125
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Flexible service system
The service indicator disappears automatically after
30 seconds or if the knob for instrument cluster
illumination, see page 88, in the instrument cluster is
pressed.
Calling up service indicator manually:
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1.
Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by
pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel until the display appears. See page 96.
Press button j or k until the FSS indicator
appears.
The next or previous system is displayed by pressing
button è or ÿ.
Important!
The FSS indicator is not an engine oil level indicator.
See page 128 for engine oil level indicator.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

126
Note:
When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more
days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any such
days not counted by the FSS can be added by your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The interval between services is determined by the type
of driving for which the vehicle is used. For example,
driving at extreme speeds, and cold starts combined
with short distance driving in which the engine does not
reach operating normal temperature, reduce the interval
between services.

Index

Following a completed A or B service the Mercedes-Benz
Center sets the counter mileage to 10 000 miles
(Canada: 15 000 km) and 365 days.

The multifunction display will show the question:
“DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? –
CONFIRM BY PRESSING R”

The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so:

Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster again to
reset the service indicator.

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1.

The new service indicator is displayed with the reset
distance of 10 000 miles (Canada 15 000 km).

To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press
button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel until the display appears. See page 96.

If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have a
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.

Press button j or k until the FSS indicator
appears.

However you choose to set your reference numbers, the
scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet
must be followed to properly care for your vehicle.

Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see
page 88, for approximately 2 seconds.

Flexible service system
Instruments
and controls

Operation

127
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Engine oil level indicator

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

128
• with engine not at operational temperature up to
approximately 30 minutes.

Engine oil level indicator

The engine oil level check can be repeated after a short
time.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press
button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel until the display appears. See page 96.

P54.30-3607-26

To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.
Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping
the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan.
The message “PERF. SERV. ON TIME” (perform service
[engine oil level check] on time) will be displayed if the
required waiting period has not been observed after
stopping the engine:
• with engine at operational temperature
approximately 5 minutes.

Press button j or k on the multifunction
steering wheel repeatedly until the “MEASUREMENT
CORRECT – ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL” engine oil level
indicator appears. This indicator is only a reminder.
Measurement can be cancelled by pressing button j
or k if the vehicle is not parked on level ground. An
incorrect reading will be recorded if you do not cancel
the measurement. Move the vehicle to level ground and
measure again.
The electronic key in starter switch is not in position 2 if
the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – SWITCH ON IGNITION”
message appears.
The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – MEASURING NOW”
message is displayed after approximately 3 seconds.

Index

The “PERF. SERV. ON TIME” message will be displayed
if a proper oil level check cannot be performed. The
engine oil level check can be repeated after a short
while.

One of the following messages will subsequently appear
on the indicator:
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – O.K.”
No oil needs to be added.

“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.5 QUART”
(Canada: 1.5 L)

Perform the engine oil level check with the dipstick, if it
cannot be completed via the multifunction display.
See “Checking engine oil level”, on page 300.
In this case we recommend that you have the system
checked at a Mercedes-Benz Center.

“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 2.0 QUART”
(Canada: 2.0 L)

Notes:

See “Checking engine oil level”, on page 300 for
instructions on adding engine oil.

See malfunction and warning messages on page 274
and page 283 if an engine oil level indicator appears on
the multifunction display when the engine is running.

“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – REDUCE OIL LEVEL”
Do not overfill the engine.
Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could
cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

The engine oil level cannot be checked while the engine
is running. The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – NOT WHEN
ENGINE ON” message will appear.

“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.0 QUART”
(Canada: 1.0 L)

Engine oil consumption
Engine oil consumption checks should only be made
after the break-in period. During the break-in period,
higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal.
Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in
increased consumption.
Engine oil level indicator
Instruments
and controls

Operation

129
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Exterior lamp switch
Exterior lamp switch

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

130
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)
‡ Front fog lamps (pull out one stop) with parking
lamps and/or low beam headlamps on. Green
indicator in lamp switch comes on.
† Rear fog lamp (pull out to second detent) in
addition to the front fog lamps. Yellow indicator in
lamp switch comes on.
Note:
With the electronic key removed and the driver’s door
open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps
(except standing lamps) are not switched off.

M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode, see below.
C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps,
licence plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only: When the engine is running, the low
beam is additionally switched on.
B Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam
headlamps (combination switch pushed forward).

Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or
the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be
used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult
your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
regarding allowable lamp operation.
Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the
exterior lamp switch is turned to position M or U.

Index

Headlamp mode (HEADLAMPS)
(USA only)

Automatic operation:
With electronic key in starter switch in position 1 turn
exterior lamp switch to position U.

The headlamps can be switched on and off manually or
automatically, or switched to daytime running lamp
mode.

The parking lamps switch on and off automatically
depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

Manual operation:

With the engine running and exterior lamp switch in
position U:

The low beam headlamps, parking lamps and license
plate lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior
lamp switch. For exterior lamp switch, see page 130.

The low beam headlamps, parking lamps and license
plate lamps are switched on and off automatically
depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

Warning!

The low beam headlamps, parking lamps and license
plate lamps can still be switched on and off manually
using the exterior lamp switch.

The driver is responsible for the operation of the
vehicle’s lights at all times. The automatic
headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver.
Switch on the vehicle lights by hand when driving
or traffic conditions require you to do so.

Note:
The headlamps will not be automatically switched on
under foggy conditions.

Exterior lamp switch
Instruments
and controls

Operation

131
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Exterior lamp switch

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

132

Daytime running lamp mode

Night security illumination

Turn exterior lamp switch to position M.

When turning off the engine, the exterior lamps switch
on for added illumination, if they were previously
switched on (except in daytime running mode). After
the last door has been closed the lamp-on time period
commences.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps
(includes parking lamps and license plate lamps) are
automatically switched on.
Canada only:
When shifting from a driving position to position “N”
or “P”, the low beam switches off (3 minutes delay).
For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch should
be turned to position B to permit activation of the
high beam headlamps.
USA only:
The high beam headlamps can also be activated when
driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated
and exterior lamp switch in position M.

The lamp-on time period for night security illumination
can be set at several different timed levels from 0 (off) to
60 seconds, see “Individual settings” - “LIGHTING” on
page 117.
Notes:
Within 10 minutes after closing the last door the night
security illumination can be reactivated by opening a
door.

See page 130 for notes on the exterior lamp switch.

See “Individual settings” – “LIGHTING” on page 117 for
instructions on how to activate the function.

To activate the daytime running lamp mode, see
“Individual settings” – “LIGHTING” on page 117.

Deactivating night security illumination temporarily:
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 0
then to position 2 and back to position 0 again before
getting out of the vehicle. The night security
illumination will not be activated when the door is
opened.

Index

Headlamp cleaning system

Locator lighting
After unlocking the vehicle with the electronic main key
during darkness, the fog lamps, parking lamps,
taillamps and license plate lamps switch on for
approximately 40 seconds.
The exterior lamps will be switched off when opening
the driver’s door.
See “Individual settings” – “LIGHTING” on page 117 for
instructions on how to activate the function.

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1.
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-pressure
water jet when you press the headlamp washer
button (1).
See page 302 for instructions on filling up the
windshield/headlamp washer reservoir.

Exterior lamp switch
Instruments
and controls

Operation

133
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Combination switch
Combination switch

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

134
3 High beam flasher (high beam available
independent of exterior lamp switch position)
4 Turn signals, right
5 Turn signals, left
To signal minor directional changes, such as changing
lanes on a highway, move combination switch briefly to
the point of resistance only and release. The turn
signals blink three times.
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the
combination switch past the point of resistance (up or
down). The switch is automatically canceled when the
steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.

1 Low beam
(exterior lamp switch position B)
2 High beam
(exterior lamp switch position B)

Turn signal failure
If one of the turn signals fails, the turn signal indicator
system flashes and sounds at a faster than normal rate.

Index

0 Off
I

Intermittent wiping
Vehicles with optional rain sensor:
One initial wipe, pauses between wipes are
automatically controlled by a rain sensor
monitoring the wetness of the windshield. This
will not occur with a front door open.
Notes:
With switch in this position, one wipe occurs
when turning the electronic key in starter switch
from position 0. This will not occur with a front
door open.

6 Press switch briefly:
Single wipe without washer fluid
(select only if windshield is wet).

Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle
is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
presence of water spray at windshield, and
wipers may be damaged as a result.

Push switch past resistance point:
Windshield washer system, windshield wipers.
See page 302 for instructions on filling the
windshield washer reservoir.

II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed

7 Windshield wipers

Combination switch
Instruments
and controls

Operation

135
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Combination switch

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

136

Blocked windshield wipers

Windshield wipers smear

If the windshield wipers become blocked (for example,
due to snow), switch off the wipers.
For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove
electronic key from starter switch. Remove blockage.

If the windshield wipers smear the windshield, even
during rain, activate the washer system as often as
necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be
mixed in the correct ratio.

Activate combination switch again (electronic key in
starter switch position 1).

See page 302 for instructions on filling up the
windshield washer reservoir.

Emergency operation of windshield wipers

Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio

In case of windshield wiper malfunction in switch
positions I or III, turn combination switch to wiper
setting II. Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

For temperatures above freezing:
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water.
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water).
For temperature below freezing:
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).

Index

Hazard warning flasher switch

To activate hazard warning flasher, press switch once.
To deactivate, press switch again.
If hazard warning flasher was activated automatically,
press switch twice to deactivate.
Note:
With the hazard warning flasher activated, the
combination switch in position for either left or right
turn, and the electronic key in starter switch position 1
or 2, only the respective left or right side turn signals
will operate.

The hazard warning flasher can be activated either
manually via the switch located in the dashboard, or it
is activated automatically at the time an airbag is
deployed.

Hazard warning flasher
Instruments
and controls

Operation

137
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Climate control

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

138

Climate control (model C 240)

P83.20-2127-29

Index

1 Display and controls

6 Air volume control for right center air outlet

2 Air volume control for left center air outlet

7 Air volume control and air outlet on dashboard top
center

3 Center air outlet, left, adjustable

8 Air volume control for side air outlet

4 Thumbwheel for adding outside air at air outlets for
center, left and right sides, as well as dashboard top
center and rear passenger compartment

9 Side air outlet, adjustable
10 Side defroster outlet, fixed

5 Center air outlet, right, adjustable

Climate control
Instruments
and controls

139
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Climate control

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

140

Display and controls

5 Rear window defroster, see page 157
6 Economy mode, see page 145
Residual engine heat utilization, see page 145
7 Air distribution and air volume (automatic)
8 Air recirculation, see page 153
9 Defrosting, see page 143
Important!

P83.30-3425-26

1 Air volume
2 Temperature control, left
3 Temperature control, right
4 Air distribution control switch

This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioning
system that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a
refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a
qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected
in a recovery system for recycling.

Index

Climate control

Notes:

The system is always at operational readiness, except
when manually switched off.

Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air
flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.

The climate control only operates with the engine
running.

Also keep the air intake grill in front of the windshield
free of snow and debris.

The temperature selector should be left at the desired
temperature setting. The temperature selected is
reached as quickly as possible.

The storage compartment between the front seats can be
ventilated. See page 158 for notes on ventilating the
storage space under the armrest in the center console.

The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a
higher or lower temperature.

The air conditioner switches itself off for its own
protection if refrigerant is lost. No cooling will then take
place. Economy mode S cannot be switched off. Have
the air conditioner checked by a Mercedes-Benz Center
should this happen.

The desired interior temperature can be selected
separately for the left and right side of the passenger
compartment.
The climate control removes considerable moisture from
the air during operation in the cooling mode. It is
normal for water to drip on the ground through ducts in
the underbody.

Dust filter
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out
before outside air enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the
economy mode S is selected, see page 145.

Climate control
Instruments
and controls

141
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Climate control

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

142

Basic setting – automatic mode

Special settings (use only for short duration)

Press U button. Air volume and distribution are
controlled automatically.

Air distribution and air volume, manual

Set the left and right temperature to 72°F (22°C). This
provides for comfortable conditions in the vehicle.

Press U button. The indicator lamp in the button will
go out.
Select any of the six air volume speeds and the air
distribution.

Heating mode:
To lower headroom temperature, use thumbwheel
(4, page 138).

Air distribution, manual:

Air conditioning mode:
Open air outlets at dashboard top center (7, page 138)
for an even air distribution.

j Air from the windshield, side defroster and rear
passenger compartment air outlets.

h Air from the center, side, dashboard top center
and rear passenger compartment air outlets.

k Air from the center, side, footwell, rear footwell
and rear passenger compartment air outlets.
To return to automatic mode:
Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the button
illuminates.

Index

Defrosting

Windows fogged up on the inside

Press the P button. The indicator lamp in the button
illuminates.

Switch off the economy mode, if selected. Press
button S. The indicator lamp in the button will go
out.

Switch off air recirculation, if selected. Press
button O, the indicator lamp in the button will go
out.

Switch off air recirculation, if selected. Press
button O. The indicator lamp in the button will go
out.

Close center air outlets.

Press the P button. The indicator lamp in the button
illuminates.

Turn wheels (8, page 138) up to open left and right side
air outlets (9, page 138). Adjust side air outlets upward.

Increase temperature setting.

Pressing the switch again returns the system to the
previous setting.

Climate control
Instruments
and controls

Open the side air outlets (9, page 138) and direct them
onto the side windows.

143
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Climate control
Windshield fogged up on the outside
Switch on the windshield wiper.
Close air outlet at dashboard top center.
Switch to manual mode.
Turn air distribution switch to position h or k.
Air recirculation
Select air recirculation:
Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

144
Switching off air recirculation and activating
convenience opening:
Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof return to the
position they were in before closing.
A window or the sliding/pop-up roof opened manually
after convenience closing will no longer be returned to
the position it was in before closing when convenience
opening is selected.
The system automatically switches from air
recirculation to fresh air:

To switch off the air recirculation:

• after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above
about 40°F (5°C),

Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the
button will go out.

• after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below
about 40°F (5°C),

Switching on air recirculation and activating
convenience closing of power windows and sliding/
pop-up roof:

• after 5 minutes if economy mode S is selected.

Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will be closed. The
indicator lamp in the button lights up.

The system switches automatically to air recirculation at
high outside temperatures. A quantity of outside air is
added after about 30 minutes.
If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch
from recirculated air back to fresh air.

Index

Residual engine heat utilization

Climate control - OFF/ON
To switch the climate control off, set the air volume
control switch to position 0.
The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off.

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue
to heat or ventilate the interior for a short while. Air
volume and distribution are controlled automatically.

While driving, use this setting only temporarily,
otherwise the windshield could fog up.

To select:

To switch the climate control on again, set air volume
control switch to any speed.

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 0 or remove it altogether.
Press button T. The indicator lamp in the button
illuminates.

Economy mode

This function selection will not activate if the battery
level is insufficient.

The function of this setting corresponds to the
automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning
compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not
possible to air condition in this setting.

The function switches off automatically:
• if the electronic key in starter switch is turned to
position 2,

Press S button to activate. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.

• after approximately 30 minutes,

Press S button once again to return to the previous
setting.

• if the battery voltage drops.

Important!
In the S mode the windows could fog up on the
inside. Switch off S mode.
Climate control
Instruments
and controls

145
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Automatic climate control

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

146

Automatic climate control

P83.30-3413-29

Index

1 Display and controls

6 Air volume control for right center air outlet

2 Air volume control for left center air outlet

7 Air volume control and air outlet on dashboard top
center

3 Center air outlet, left, adjustable

8 Air volume control for side air outlet

4 Thumbwheel for adding outside air at air outlets for
center, left and right sides, as well as dashboard top
center and rear passenger compartment

9 Side air outlet, adjustable
10 Side defroster outlet, fixed

5 Center air outlet, right, adjustable

Automatic climate control
Instruments
and controls

Operation

147
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic climate control

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

148
7 Temperature control, right, raising

Display and controls

8 Temperature control, right, lowering
9 Rear window defroster, see page 157
10 Economy mode, see page 155
Residual engine heat utilization, see page 156
11 Air volume control +
switch on system
12 Air volume control switch off system
13 Air recirculation, see page 153
P83.40-2265-26

14 Defrosting, see page 152

1 Temperature control, left, lowering

Important!

2 Temperature control, left, raising

3 Air distribution control switch left (automatic,
manual operation)
4 Activated charcoal filter, see page 154
5 Display
6 Air distribution control switch right (automatic,
manual operation)

Index

Automatic climate control
The system is always at operational readiness, except
when manually switched off.
The automatic climate control only operates with the
engine running.
The temperature selector should be left at the desired
temperature setting. The temperature selected is
reached as quickly as possible.

1 Temperature, left

The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a
higher or lower temperature.

2 Temperature, right
3 Air volume

The desired interior temperature and air distribution
can be selected separately for the left and right side of
the passenger compartment.

4 Automatic mode is selected

The automatic climate control removes considerable
moisture from the air during operation in the cooling
mode. It is normal for water to drip on the ground
through ducts in the underbody.
The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the
economy mode S is selected, see page 155.

Automatic climate control
Instruments
and controls

Operation

149
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic climate control

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

150

Notes:

Basic setting – automatic mode

Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air
flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.

Briefly press left or right U button. The h, j
and k symbols will no longer be visible.

Also keep the air intake grill in front of the windshield
free of snow and debris.

The economy mode and air recirculation functions will
be switched off. The automatic blower will be activated
at the same time.

The storage compartment between the front seats can be
ventilated. See page 158 for notes on ventilating the
storage space under the armrest in the center console.
The air conditioner switches itself off for its own
protection if refrigerant is lost. No cooling will then take
place. Economy mode S cannot be switched off. Have
the air conditioner checked by a Mercedes-Benz Center
should this happen.
Dust filter
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out
before outside air enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.

Set the temperature switches on the left and right
to 72°F (22°C). This provides for comfortable conditions
in the vehicle.
Heating mode:
To lower headroom temperature, use thumbwheel
(4, page 146).
Air conditioning mode:
Open air outlets at dashboard top center (7, page 146)
for an even air distribution.

Index

Air volume, manual

Special settings (use only for short duration)

Seven blower speeds are available.

Air distribution, manual

Press right Q or left M side of air volume control
switch until the requested blower speed is attained.

Press left or right U button. The h, j
and k symbols are visible. Turn the button to select
the air distribution desired.

The display “AUTO” disappears and the automatic mode
is switched off. The selected blower speed is shown in
the display.

h Air from the center, side, dashboard top center
and rear passenger compartment air outlets.
j Air from the windshield, side defroster and rear
passenger compartment air outlets.

To return to automatic mode:
Press left or right U button. The h, j
and k symbols will no longer be visible.

k Air from the center, side, footwell, rear footwell
and rear passenger compartment air outlets.
To return to automatic mode:
Press left or right U button. The h, j
and k symbols will no longer be visible.

Automatic climate control
Instruments
and controls

Operation

151
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic climate control
Defrosting
Windows fogged up on the inside

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

152
Windshield fogged up on the outside
Switch on the windshield wiper.

Press the P button. The indicator lamp in the button
illuminates.

Close air outlet on dashboard top center (7, page 146).

Switch off air recirculation, if selected. Press
button O, the indicator lamp in the button will go
out.

Turn air distribution control switch to position h
or k.

The fan is set to a higher speed and the warm air is
directed to the defroster and windshield air outlets.
Pressing the switch again returns the system to the
previous setting.

Switch to manual mode.

Index

Air recirculation

The system automatically switches from air
recirculation to fresh air:

Select air recirculation:
Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.

• after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above
about 40°F (5°C),

To switch off the air recirculation:

• after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below
about 40°F (5°C),

Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the
button will go out.

• after 5 minutes if economy mode S is selected.

Switching on air recirculation and activating
convenience closing of power windows and sliding/
pop-up roof:

The system switches automatically to air recirculation at
high outside temperatures. A quantity of outside air is
added after about 30 minutes.

Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will be closed. The
indicator lamp in the button lights up.

If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch
from recirculated air back to fresh air.

Switching off air recirculation and activating
convenience opening:
Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof return to the
position they were in before closing.
A window or the sliding/pop-up roof opened manually
after convenience closing will no longer be returned to
the position it was in before closing when convenience
opening is selected.
Automatic climate control
Instruments
and controls

Operation

153
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic climate control
Activated charcoal filter
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors
and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger
compartment.
To select, press e button. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.
To cancel, press button. The indicator lamp in the button
goes out.
The system switches automatically to the air
recirculation mode, if the carbon monoxide (CO) or
nitrogen oxides (NOX) concentration of the outside air
increases beyond a predetermined level.
The automatic air recirculation mode does not function
if economy mode S is selected or if the outside
temperature has fallen below 40°F (5°C).
The activated charcoal filter should be switched off
when windows fog up on the inside, or if the passenger
compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

154
Switching on the activated carbon filter and activating
convenience closing of power windows and sliding/
pop-up roof:
The indicator lamp in the e button is off.
Press button e for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will be closed. The
indicator lamp in the button lights up.
Switching off activated carbon filter and activating
convenience opening:
The indicator lamp in the e button is on.
Press button e for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof return to the
position they were in before closing.
A window or the sliding/pop-up roof opened manually
after convenience closing will no longer be returned to
the position it was in before closing when convenience
opening is selected.

Index

Economy mode

Automatic climate control - OFF/ON

The function of this setting corresponds to the
automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning
compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not
possible to air condition in this setting.

To switch the climate control off, set the air volume
control switch to position 0.
The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off.
While driving, use this setting only temporarily,
otherwise the windshield could fog up.

Press S button to activate. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.

To switch the climate control on again, press the U
or P button, or set air volume control switch to any
speed.

Press S button once again to return to the previous
setting.
Important!
In the S mode the windows could fog up on the
inside. Switch off S mode.

Automatic climate control
Instruments
and controls

Operation

155
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic climate control
Residual engine heat utilization
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue
to heat or ventilate the interior for a short while. Air
volume and distribution are controlled automatically.
To select:
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 0 or remove it altogether.
Press button T. The indicator lamp in the button
illuminates.
This function selection will not activate if the battery
level is insufficient.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

156
The function switches off automatically:
• if the electronic key in starter switch is turned to
position 2,
• after approximately 30 minutes,
• if the battery voltage drops.

Index

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power.
To keep the battery drain to a minimum, turn off the
defroster as soon as the rear window is clear.

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2.

The defroster is automatically turned off after
approximately 6–17 minutes of operation depending on
the outside temperature and vehicle speed.

To select:
Press the F button in the control panel of the
automatic air conditioner. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.

If several power consumers are turned on
simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged,
it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn
itself off. When this happens, the indicator lamp inside
the switch starts blinking.

To cancel:
Press the F button in the control panel of the
automatic air conditioner. The indicator lamp in the
button goes out.

As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
defroster automatically turns itself back on.

Note:
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed
before activating the defroster.

Automatic climate control
Instruments
and controls

Operation

157
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic climate control
Front center console storage compartment
ventilation

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

158
The air volume is dependent on the setting of:
• air distribution control,
• air volume control,
• air outlets in the dashboard.
The air temperature is about the same as that of the
dashboard air outlets. It cannot be regulated separately.
Notes:
The compartment can get very warm due to its confined
space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the
compartment, close the air outlet while heating the
passenger compartment.
Do not allow articles to obstruct the air outlet in the
storage compartment.

The front center console compartment has its own air
outlet.
To open: Raise lever (1).
To close: Lower lever (1).

Index

Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets

1 Center air outlet, left
2 Air volume control for center air outlets
To open: Turn the wheel upward.
3 Center air outlet, right
Note:
The temperature at the air outlets for the rear passenger
compartment (1 and 3) is the same as at the dashboard
center air outlets.

Automatic climate control
Instruments
and controls

Operation

159
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system
Audio and telephone operation
These instructions are intended to help you become
acquainted with your Mercedes-Benz audio system.
They contain useful tips and a detailed description of
the user functions.
Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an
accident, system settings should be entered with
the vehicle at standstill and systems should be
operated by the driver only when traffic conditions
permit. Always pay full attention to traffic
conditions first before operating system controls
while driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a
distance of 50 feet (approximately14 m) every
second.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

160
Operating safety
Warning!
Any alterations made to electronic components can
cause malfunctions.
The radio, cassette deck, CD changer1 and
telephone1 are interconnected. Therefore, when
one of the components is defective or has not been
removed/replaced properly this may impair the
function of other components.
These malfunctions might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service work or
alterations to electronic components done at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Optional equipment
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

Index

Operating and display elements

1 On/off, volume, see page 163

4 Radio mode selector, see page 166

2 Telephone mode selector, see page 177

5 Manual tuning, see page 167 and 167
Fast Forward/Reverse (tape), see page 171
Fast Forward/Reverse (CD), see page 176
Telephone book, see page 178

3 Seek tuning, see page 167,
Track search (tape), see page 171,
Skipping tracks (CD), see page 175
Manual repeat dialing (telephone), see page 180

6 CD mode selector, see page 175
7 Tape mode selector, see page 169

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

161
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

162

8 Display panel
The cassette slot is located behind the display panel.
For notes on playing cassettes, see page 169

10 Scan tuning (Radio, see page 167)
Tape track search, see page 171
CD, see page 167

9 Alpha-numeric keypad for
station storage and frequency entry, see page 169
optional telephone, see page 177
Tape eject, see page 170
Tape track select, see page 171
Dolby, see page 172
CD track access, see page 177

11 Function button, see page 169 and 177
12 Soft keys for
radio band selection, see page 166
tone controls, see page 164
scan, see page 167
13 Tape eject, see page 169

Index

Operation

Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric keypad (right
side of radio face) and the function buttons (left side of
the radio face) are referred to as “buttons” and the four
keys under the display are referred to as “soft keys”

Switching on and off
Press the control knob

The system is switched off when the electronic main key
in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed.
The radio is switched on again when the electronic main
key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 2.

Note:
Do not press directly on the radio display face.

Note:
The system can also be switched on separately with the
electronic main key removed, but will switch itself off
automatically after half an hour to conserve vehicle
battery power.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

163
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system
Adjusting the volume

Practical hints

The volume setting can be selected separately for the
telephone, audio system and voice recognition system.

Technical
data

164
Bass
Press the “AUD” key
repeatedly until “BASS”
appears on the display.

Turning the control knob clockwise will increase the
volume, counterclockwise will decrease the volume.
Note:

Car care

Press the “+” key to increase
or the “-” key to decrease the level.
Pressing the “+” and “-” keys simultaneously resets the
Bass to its center (flat) level.

Audio functions
The “AUD” key is used to select the BASS, TREBLE,
FADER and BALANCE functions. Settings for bass and
treble are stored separately for the radio, cassette and
CD modes. Tone level settings are identified by the
vertical bars. The center (flat) setting is shown by one
longer bar in the center of the display.

Treble
Press the “AUD” key
repeatedly until “TREBLE”
appears on the display.
Press the “+” key to increase
or the “-” key to decrease the level.
Pressing the “+” and “-” keys simultaneously resets the
Treble to its center (flat) level.

Index

Fader

Centering all audio functions

Press the “AUD” key
repeatedly until “FADER”
appears on the display. Press
the “R” key to move the sound
to the rear speakers or the “F”
key to move the sound to the front speakers.

Push and hold down the
“AUD” key. All audio
functions (bass, treble,
balance and fader) are set to
center or flat positions, and
the volume is adjusted to a preset level. “RESET”
appears on the display.

Pressing the “F” and “R” keys simultaneously resets the
Fader to its center level.
Balance
Press the “AUD” key
repeatedly until “BALANCE”
appears on the display.
Press the “L” key to move the
sound to the left speakers or the “R” key to move the
sound to the right speakers.
Pressing the “L” and “R” keys simultaneously resets the
Balance to its center level.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

165
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system
Audio system tone level selection
To select the tone level
settings for radio, cassette,
and CD operation press the
key “AUD”. The tone level
settings menu is now
displayed. Press key “EXT”, and “SOUND” appears on
the display.

Practical hints

The key “AMB” offers “Ambience” , a three-dimensional
sound.
The key “OFF” switches off the tone level setting
selection.

Technical
data

166
Radio mode
Selecting radio mode
Press

button.

Selecting the band
Press the key located below
the desired band. The band
selected is shown in the top
line of the display.

Press the key “DRV” to adjust the sound to the “Driver”
position.
The key “SP” is for “Speech”, optimizing the sound for
spoken language.

Car care

Frequency ranges:

87.9 -107.9 MHz

530 -1710 kHz

approx.162 MHz

Index

Seek tuning

Manual tuning

Press either the
or
button. The radio will tune
to the next receivable station.

Press either the
or
button. Step-by-step station
tuning in ascending or
descending order of
frequency will take place.

Scan tuning
Press the SC # button. Each
strongly receivable station on
the band selected will be
tuned in for 8 seconds. The
first scan will tune only the
stations with a high signal strength. The second scan
will tune every receivable station. By pressing either the
,
,
,
buttons or the SC # button the
scan mode can be cancelled.

The first three tuning steps will take place without
muting. The radio will then be muted and high-speed
tuning will take place until the button is released.
The following tuning intervals will be shown on the
display:
FM

200 kHz

10 kHz

Channels 1-7

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

167
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Instrument
cluster display

Driving

Audio system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

168
Storing stations automatically (Autostore)

Weather Band

Press the “AS” key until the
word “SEARCH” is displayed.
The ten strongest stations are
stored automatically, with
having the strongest
signal.

Press the “WB” key. The last weather band station is
tuned in.
7
Use buttons
- PQRS
to select a different station. If
the station cannot be received, the next available station
is selected automatically.

Press button
or
. The next available station is
tuned in. The message “WB NONE” appears if no station
can be received.
Station memory
Ten stations each in the AM and FM bands can be stored
via the alpha-numeric keypad. The 0 button
corresponds to location 10. Weatherband (WB)
channels 1 to 7 are preset at the factory and can be
retrieved via the alpha-numeric keypad, but cannot be
changed.
OPR

Note:
Autostore memory is in addition to the regular station
memory. Previously stored stations are not erased.
Briefly press “AS” to leave the Autostore and return to
manual presets. Press “AS” again to call up Autostore.

Index

Cassette mode

Storing stations
0

Hold the desired number button
down for
approximately 2 seconds. The currently displayed
frequency is stored on the selected station button. The
storage procedure is confirmed by a short signal tone.
OPR

Playing cassettes
Press the TAPE button. When the EJ button is pressed,
the display folds down and the cassette slot becomes
visible. Push the cassette gently into the slot until it
engages. The cassette will be pulled in automatically.

Retrieving a station from memory
Press the desired station button

OPR

Note:
Do not press directly on the display face.

Direct frequency input (AM and FM only)

Return the display panel to its normal position by
folding it back up and pressing gently on the display
frame to lock in place.

Select the band. Press the
“ button and enter the
desired frequency using the
alpha-numeric keypad
0
. Frequencies outside of
the frequency ranges (frequencies specified on
page 166) will not be accepted. The frequency input
mode is cancelled if no button is pressed within
4 seconds.

Important!

OPR

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

If the display is in the down position for more than
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is
returned to its normal position.

169
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system
The system will switch to
cassette mode. Track 1 will be
played and “SIDE 1”
displayed. Track 1 is the side
of the cassette which is facing
upwards. The cassette deck will automatically detect the
type of tape and switch the equalization automatically.
A cassette symbol on the display indicates that a tape is
in the mechanism. This symbol appears in all modes
except cassette mode.
The cassette will not be ejected when the system is
switched off or another mode is selected.
If a cassette is in the mechanism, cassette mode can be
selected by using the TAPE button.
If no cassette has been inserted, the display will show
“NO TAPE”.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

170
Cassette eject
Press the EJ button. The display will fold down and
the cassette will be ejected. Remove the cassette, then
fold the display back up manually. The system will
switch back to radio mode automatically.
Notes:
The cassette will not be ejected when the system is
switched off. If a cassette is not ejected, continue to hold
the EJ button for at least 5 seconds to eject the
cassette.
Important!
If the display is in the down position for more than
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is
returned to its normal position.

Index

Track selection

Note:
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a
break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.

Press the track selection
“TRK” key. The current track
will be displayed as “SIDE 1”
or “SIDE 2”. The track will be
changed automatically at the
end of the tape.

Fast forward/reverse
Press the
button.
“FORWARD” will appear on
the display and fast forward
will start.

Track search forward/backward
Press the
button.
“SEEK FWD” will be shown on
the display and the track
search will run the tape
forward to the start of the next
track.

Press the
button.
“REWIND” will appear on the
display and fast reverse will
start.
Fast forward/reverse is stopped by pressing the same
button again, or it will stop automatically at the
beginning or the end of the tape. The track will
automatically change at the end or beginning of the tape
and play will begin.

Press the
button.
“SEEK RWD” will be shown
on the display and the track
search will run the tape
backward to the start of the
track currently playing. Track search can be interrupted
by pressing the same button again.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

171
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

172

Scanning

Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)

Press the SC # button. “SEEK
FWD” will appear on the
display. Each track will be
played for 8 seconds in
ascending order. The search
will stop if any of the SC # ,
,
,
,
buttons are pressed.

To enable optimum sound
reproduction of cassettes
recorded using the Dolby B
system, press the “NR” key so
the “NR” on the display is
highlighted. To turn off Dolby B noise reduction, press
the “NR” key so the “NR” on the display is not
highlighted.

Skipping of blank sections (Skip-Blank)

1 Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

Press the “SB” key. The SkipBlank function is switched on
or off. When switched on, the
“SB” on the display is
highlighted.
With the “SB” function activated and no sound signal
received for approximately 10 to 15 seconds, the tape
will fast forward to the next sound signal.

Index

CD mode

Replace the CD in its container after use. Protect CDs
from heat and direct sunlight.

General notes on CD mode

Warning!

Should excessive temperatures occur while in CD mode,
“CD TEMP HIGH” will appear on the display and muting
will take place. The unit will then switch back to radio
mode until the temperature has decreased to a safe
operating level.

The CD changer1 is a Class1 laser product. There is
a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover is
opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer1 does not
contain any parts which can be serviced by the
user. For safety reasons, have any service work
which may be necessary performed only by
qualified personnel.

Should temperatures occur while in CD mode which are
too low, “CD TEMP LOW” will be displayed, but the CD
will play. It will be sensitive to skipping if you are
driving over rough roads.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during
playback.

1 Optional equipment

Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs. Do not write on the
CDs or apply any label or other material or devices to
the CDs.
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially
available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays,
etc. should be used.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

173
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

174

CD changer1 installed

Loading/emptying the CD magazine
Slide the changer door to the right until it latches open
and press the eject button
. The magazine will be
ejected. Remove the magazine. Pull out the CD tray to its
stop and place the CDs in the recess of the tray, label
side up. Push the tray into the magazine in the direction
shown by the arrow. Insert the loaded magazine into the
changer.

2
3
1

Important!
Close the door after the magazine has been inserted.

1 CD changer
2 CD magazine
3 CD tray
4 CD
If a CD changer1 is installed, it can be operated from the
front control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must
be installed for CD playing.
1 Optional equipment

Index

Playing CDs

Skipping tracks forward/backward

Press the
button. When the changer is used for the
first time after removing/inserting a magazine, play
begins at CD 1 track 1. After that, the CD most recently
played will start at the point where it was last switched
off. CDs stored in the magazine can be selected by using
the station preset buttons 1-6.

Press the
played.

button. The next track on the CD will be

Press the
button. If the track has been playing for
more than10 seconds, it will revert to the start of that
track. If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it
will revert to the preceding track. To skip several tracks,
the respective button must be pressed until the desired
track is reached. If the beginning or end of the CD is
reached during the search, the first or last track will be
played.

The magazine slot number of
the selected CD will be
displayed after “CD”. The
number of the track being
played will be displayed after
“TRACK”.
If there is no CD in the
selected magazine slot,
“NO CD” and the
corresponding slot number
will be displayed
(e.g.“NO CD3”). After the last track on a CD has been
played, the next CD will automatically be selected and
played.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

175
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

176
Random play/repeat function

Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the

button for audible fast forward.

Press and hold the

button for audible reverse.

The search will stop when the
button is released. The played
time of the track will be
displayed during the search.
The search mode will cancel if
the beginning or end of the CD is reached.
Scanning
Press the SC # button. Each track will be played for
8 seconds in ascending order. The search will stop at the
current track if any of the
,
,
,
, SC #
buttons are pressed.

The tracks of the current CD are played in random order
when the random feature (RDM) is selected. Press the
“RDM” key to switch on. “RDM” will be highlighted.
Press “RDM” again to switch off.
When the repeat function
(RPT) has been selected, a
particular track can be played
for as many times as desired.
Press the “RPT” key to switch
on. “RPT” will be highlighted. Press “RPT” again to
switch off.
Note:
Both functions cannot be used simultaneously.

Index

Direct track selection

Telephone operation

Tracks can be selected directly using the buttons on the
alpha-numeric keypad. Press the “ function button,
followed by the track number.

Various functions of the Mercedes-Benz integrated
portable cellular telephone1 can be performed and
displayed via the system. Further instructions for
operating the integrated telephone can be found in the
operation guide for the telephone1.

Track and time display
Pressing the function button
“T” displays the track number
and elapsed playing time of
the track being played.

Switching the telephone on and off
Switching on:
Press the
button.
Switching off:
Press and hold the
button until “PHONE OFF”
appears on the display.

Pressing the function button “T” again displays the total
number of tracks and the total playing time of the CD
being played. After 8 seconds the display switches back
to the main display.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

1 Optional equipment

177
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

178

Adjusting the volume

Calling up the telephone book

Turning the control knob clockwise will increase the
volume, counterclockwise will decrease the volume.

The numbers stored in the telephone number memory
can be called up via either name or number entries. The
memory contents from the portable telephone must
contain numbers and names in at least one memory
location and the portable telephone must be connected
to the vehicle coil cord in order to call up the telephone
book. Refer to the “Memory download” section of the
cellular telephone operation guide for more information.

Note:
The volume setting can be selected separately for the
telephone, audio system and voice recognition system.
Entering telephone number and starting dialing
process
Enter the desired telephone
number using the alphanumeric keypad. The number
can have up to 32 digits, but
only 13 of these can be
displayed. The dialing process is started by pressing the
“SND” key. The entered number can be corrected using
the “CLR” key.
Press the “CLR” key briefly, and the last digit will be
deleted.
Press and hold the “CLR” key, and the complete number
will be deleted.

Switching between name search and number search
Press “ABC” key - Name search
Press “NUM” key - Number search

Index

Searching and selecting telephone book entries by
name

Searching and selecting telephone book entries by
number

Press the “ABC” key. The
current name is shown on the
display. The stored entries in
alphabetical order can be
selected using the
or
button. By pressing the
or
button, the
stored entries can be selected according to alphabetical
initial letters (e.g. A-Adam, B-Brown, M-Miller).

Press the “NUM” key. The
current number is shown on
the display. The stored entries
can be selected in numerical
order using the
or
button. By pressing the
or
button, the stored
entries can be selected in increments of 5 (e.g. Entry
no. 2, Entry no. 7, etc.).

Using the buttons
- 0 on the alpha-numeric
keypad the stored entries can be selected according
initial letters (e.g. B-Brown, press button 2 twice).

Placing a call

OPR

When a number or a name
has been selected using the
method described above,
press the “SND” key.

Note:
Some signs and symbols cannot be displayed.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

179
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

180

Manual repeat dialing (redial)
The last number entered can be re-selected by pressing
the “SND” key once, and the call can be placed by
pressing the “SND” key a second time. The last dialed
telephone number is shown on the display. Using the
,
,
or
button, the numbers stored in
the re-dial memory of the telephone can be selected.
The abbreviation L and the
number in the memory are
shown in the top line of the
display.
Automatic repeat dialing (redial)
If no call can be placed, press the “SND” key.

Abbreviated dialing from previously stored
telephone numbers
Quick-dialing
Enter the previously selected
maximum 3-digit (1 - 999)
number and press “RCL”.
The telephone number
previously stored under that number will be displayed.
Press the soft key “SND”. The call is set up.
Speed-dialing
Enter the memory location desired with buttons
0
. You can enter up to 2 digits.

OPR

“REDIAL” is shown on the display and repeated
attempts will be made for the next four minutes.

To correct the last digit press the soft key “CLR”.
Press the soft key “SND”. The phone number stored at
this memory location will appear on the screen and the
call is set up.
The abbreviation “L” and the number in the memory are
shown in the top line of the display.

Accepting incoming call in telephone mode

Express-dialing
Press one of the number buttons
than 1 second.

OPR

With an incoming call, a
ringing tone can be heard and
the message “CALL” appears
on the display. Press the
“SND” key to answer the call.

for more

The phone number or the name stored at this memory
location will appear on the screen.
When the call is initiated, the call time will appear on
the display.

Accepting incoming call in tape, CD or radio mode

Note:

If the telephone is activated in the background (symbol
“S” on the display), then a switch is made automatically
to the telephone mode when a call is received. The audio
source is muted, the ringing tone is heard and the
message “CALL” appears. Press the soft key “SND” to
answer the call. After the call has been terminated, the
previously selected audio source is resumed.

Please be aware that button
might already be
reserved for an emergency call number, see page 183.
Call hold feature
While on the telephone, a second call can be accepted
by pressing the “SND” key. The first call will be put on
hold. Press “SND” to toggle between the calls.
An additional call can be accepted after ending one of
the previous calls.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

181
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Audio system

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

182

Terminating call

Component malfunctions

A current call can be terminated by pressing the “END”
button.

The radio, CD changer1, and Mercedes-Benz integrated
cellular telephone1 are part of a fiberoptic networked
system. Failure of one of the components can lead to
malfunctions of the other components. Please contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the
Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA)
at1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
Canada) at1-800-387-0100 for more information in the
event of a malfunction.

Muting a call
Pressing the “MUT” key will
silence the call. The caller can
no longer hear you. To return
to the conversation, press the
“MUT” key again.

1 Optional equipment

Index

Emergency call

Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone
networks or if certain network services and/or
telephone functions are active. Check with your local
network operating company. It may take some time to
set up an emergency call.

Important!
If you press button
for more than 1 second, the
number stored in memory location 1 (for example 911)
will be dialed.

To use this function you must ensure that the number
stored in memory location 1 is the number to be dialed
in case of emergency.

The 911 emergency call system is a public service.
Using it without due cause is a criminal offence.
You can make an emergency call to an emergency
rescue station with a mobile communications network.

Note:
If an emergency call cannot be
connected, the message
“SYSTM BUSY” appears.

The emergency call will be placed as long as the
corresponding mobile communications network is
available. To do this, switch the telephone on if you have
not already done so.
The call will also be placed if the unlock-code is not
entered.

Audio system
Instruments
and controls

183
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

184

Power windows

Switches for:
1 left, front
2 right, front
3 left, rear
4 right, rear
There are individual switches in the front passenger
door and the rear doors for the respective windows.
Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2.
P54.25-2259-26

The control panel is located on the driver’s door.

Opening the windows:
Press the switch to resistance point.
Closing the windows:
Pull the switch to resistance point.
Release switch when window is in desired position.

Index

Express opening and closing

Warning!

Press or pull switch past resistance point and release –
window opens or closes completely.

When closing the windows, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.

To interrupt procedure, briefly press or pull switch.

In case of obstruction, the automatic reversal will
not operate if a window is being closed by pulling
the switch to its resistance point and holding it
there, or when using the electronic main key.

If the upward movement of the window is blocked
during the closing procedure, the window will stop
during the last few inches before closure and open
slightly.

The closing procedure can be immediately reversed
by either pressing or pulling the switch, or
pressing button Œ on the electronic main key
and holding it.

When pulling and holding the switch to close the
window, and upward movement of the window is
blocked during the last few inches before closure, it will
stop but not open slightly.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause
serious personal injury.

Note:
The power windows can also be opened and closed
using the convenience opening/closing feature, see
page 29.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

185
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment
Blocking of rear door window operation

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

186
Synchronizing power windows
If the power supply was interrupted, (battery
disconnected or low), the windows cannot be opened or
closed by the express feature.
To resynchronize the express feature, pull switch until
the window is completely closed and hold for
approximately 1 second. Repeat procedure for each
window.
The automatic full opening and closing procedure of the
windows should now be restored.

The switch (1) is located on the driver’s door.
If no operation of the rear windows by switch (for
instance by children) is desired, slide override
switch (1) to the right; the N symbol becomes
visible.
Operation of the rear door windows with the switches
located in the driver’s door is still possible.

Index

Sliding/pop-up roof

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof:
Move the switch to resistance point in the required
direction.
Release the switch when the roof has reached the
required position.
Warning!
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause
serious personal injury.

1 to slide roof open
2 to slide roof closed
3 to raise roof at rear
4 to lower roof at rear

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

187
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment
Opening or closing the sliding/pop-up roof
automatically
Move the switch past resistance point in the direction
required and release.
The sliding/pop-up roof opens or closes completely.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

188
With the roof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid
into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When
sliding the roof open, the screen will also retract.
Notes:

Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof:
Move the switch in any direction.

The sliding/pop-up roof can also be opened and closed
using the summer opening/convenience feature, see
page 29.

If the movement of the sliding/pop-up roof is blocked
during the closing procedure, the roof will stop and
reopen slightly.

To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any
objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the
sliding/pop-up roof.

Warning!

The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur, see
page 335.

When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause
serious personal injury.

Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof
The sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized if the
power supply has been interrupted (battery
disconnected or low), the sliding/pop-up roof has been
closed manually or the sliding/pop-up roof does not
open smoothly or malfunctions.
• Press the switch in the “raise” (3) direction, wait
until the sliding/pop-up roof is fully raised at rear
and hold the switch for approximately 1 second.

Index

Interior lighting

3 To switch off automatic function:
Press the rocker switch.
The interior lighting remains switched off, even
when unlocking the vehicle or opening a door or the
electronic key is removed from the starter switch.
4 To select automatic function:
Press the rocker switch to the center position.
Interior lamps are switched on, and off (soft fade)
delayed, when unlocking or locking the vehicle, or
when opening or closing a door. However, there will
be no delay when the electronic key is in starter
switch position 2.
5 Interior lamps, front:
Press rocker switch in to switch front interior lamps
on. The interior lighting stays on while the rocker
switch is pressed in.

1 Rear interior lights
Press the button to switch the rear passenger
compartment lights on/off.

Switching off the front interior lighting:
Press rocker switch to position (3) or (4).

2 Right front reading lamp

6 Left front reading lamp:
Press the button to switch the reading lamp on or
off. The left reading lamp will be switched on or off.

Press the button to switch the reading lamp on or
off. The right reading lamp will be switched on or
off.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

189
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

190

Notes:

Door entry lamps

The time delay for the interior light to switch off after
the electronic key is removed from the starter switch
can be adjusted in the “Individual settings” –
“LIGHTING”. See page 117.

The appropriate entry lamp switches on if a door is
opened in darkness and if the interior lighting is
switched to automatic function.

To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged
with doors open, all interior lamps switch off after
approximately 5 minutes.
An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out
automatically. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that
all interior lamps are switched off.

The entry lamp switches off automatically when the
door is closed.

Index

Rear window sunshade (optional)

Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against
the window frame.
Warning!
When operating the rear window sunshade, be sure
that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the raising or lowering procedure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be
immediately halted by briefly pressing the upper or
lower half of the switch.
Briefly press upper or lower half of the switch
again to raise or lower the rear window sunshade
completely.
P68.50-2104-26

The switch is located in the center console.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
Press the switch briefly:
1 to raise
2 to lower

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

191
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment
Sun visors

Swing sun visors (2) down (arrow 3) to protect against
sun glare.
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun
visor (2) from the inner mounting (1) and pivot to the
side.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

192
Vanity mirrors

1 Illuminated vanity mirror
With the visor engaged in its inner mounting (2),
the lamp (4) can be switched on by opening the
cover (3).
Fold the cover (3) down to close the vanity mirror.
Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Index

Interior

Storage compartments and armrests

Warning!

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the seat backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window.

Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to
prevent stored objects from being thrown about
and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident.

Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

193
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Interior equipment
Glove box

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

194
Notes:
Prior to closing the glove box, close the compartment for
glasses first.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the
mechanical key. See page 23 for instructions on how to
remove the mechanical key from the electronic main
key (e.g. for valet parking service).

1 Unlocked position
2 Locked position
3 Glove box
4 Glove box lid release
Pull to open

Index

Storage compartment in front of armrest

To open:
Slide cover (5) rearward.
To close:
Slide cover (5) forward.
Note:
The compartment contains a lighter (see page 201), a
coin holder, and a cup holder (see page 197).

5 Storage compartment in front of armrest

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

195
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment
Storage compartment below the front armrest

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

196
To change inclination of armrest:
Pull up on armrest.
To lower armrest:
Pull handle (7).
Notes:
The storage compartment can be heated or cooled, see
page 158.
The compartment can get very warm due to its confined
space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the
compartment, close the air outlet while heating the
passenger compartment.
Do not obstruct the air outlet in the storage
compartment.

To open compartment in armrest:
Lift armrest by handle (6).
To open compartment under armrest:
Lift armrest by handle (7).
To close:
Lower armrest until it engages in lock.

Index

Cup holder

.
Warning!
Keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place
only containers that fit into the cup holder to
prevent spills. Do not fill containers to a height
where the contents could spill during vehicle
maneuvers, especially hot liquids.

1 Cup holder in front seat armrest
Open the storage compartment in front of the armrest,
see page 195.
Close the storage compartment in front of the armrest,
see page 195.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

197
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Interior equipment

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

198
To open:
Push front of sliding compartment – the cup holder
slides out.
To close:
Push the sliding compartment back until it engages.
Warning!
Keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place
only containers that fit into the cup holder to
prevent spills. Do not fill containers to a height
where the contents could spill during vehicle
maneuvers, especially hot liquids.

2 Cup holder in rear seat armrest

Index

Ashtrays
Center console
To open:
Briefly touch the mark on the cover, the ashtray opens
automatically.
To remove ashtray insert from center console:
Warning!
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. With the gear selector lever in position “N”,
turn off the engine and set the parking brake.
Otherwise the vehicle might move as a result of
unintended contact with the gear selector lever.

Slide ashtray insert in direction of arrow (1) until the
insert disengages. Grip ashtray insert at indents (left
and right arrows) and remove from ashtray frame.

Prior to removing the ashtray insert, move the gear
selector lever to position “N”.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

To replace insert:
Install insert into ashtray frame and push down to
engage into place.

199
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Interior equipment
Rear seats

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

200
To open ashtray:
Pull at top of cover.
To remove insert:
Press latch (2) and remove insert.
To replace insert:
Install insert and close the ashtray.

Technical
data

Index

Lighter

Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
Push in lighter in (1); it will pop out automatically when
hot.
Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of the
lighter, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.
Note:

1 Center console lighter

The lighter can be operated with electronic key in
starter switch position 1 or 2.

The lighter is located in the center console compartment
in front of the armrest, see page 195.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

The lighter socket can be used to accommodate
electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W.

201
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment
Parcel net in front passenger footwell

Practical hints

Car care

202
Ski sack (optional)

A small convenience parcel net is located in the front
passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such
as road maps, mail, etc.
Warning!
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects
having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside
the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.

Unfolding and loading
1. Fold armrest down (arrow).
2. Swing cover (1) down.

Technical
data

Index

3. Open hook and loop strap (2) and pull ski sack into
passenger compartment and unfold.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

4. Open flap in trunk by pulling handle (3).

203
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

204

5. From trunk, slide skis into ski sacks

6. Wrap strap around ski sack and armrest.

Warning!

7. Close clasp (arrows 4 and 5) and pull strap tight to
immobilize skis.

The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs of skis.
Do not load the ski sack with other objects
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an accident,
an unfastened ski sack can cause injury to vehicle
occupants.

Index

Unloading and folding

8. Connect snap hook (6) of front strap to eye (7)
located on center tunnel in front of rear seat bench.

1. Loosen strap, open clasp by pressing tabs (arrows)
together, and unload skis.
2. Close flap in trunk.
3. Disconnect snap hook (6) from eye (7).
4. Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise and place
folded ski sack inside recess of backrest.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

205
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Interior equipment

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

206
Removal of ski sack
For removal of the ski sack we recommend that you
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open while the
ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
Note:

5. Close ski sack compartment cover.

To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the
trunk, always close the pass-through.

Index

Split folding rear seat bench

Enlarged cargo area (optional)

2. Pull handle (2) and fold seat cushion (3) forward.

1. Pull handle (1) located in trunk to unlock backrest.

3. Fully retract and fold down head restraints, see
page 52.

On vehicles with optional split folding rear seat backrest
you can fold down the two sections separately to enlarge
the cargo area.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

4. Fold backrest (4) forward.

207
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

208

Setting up rear seat bench

1. Pull backrest (4) up until it locks in its upright
position. Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.
The pop-up indicators (5) (left and right backrest
section) are visible in unlocked position. With
backrest sections in upright and locked position, the
indicators (5) are fully lowered.
2. Fold seat cushion (3) back until it locks in place.
Check for secure locking by pressing on the seat
cushion.

Warning!
Always lock backrest in its upright position when
rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, cargo is
being carried in the trunk, or the extended cargo
area is not in use.
Note:
To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the
trunk, always lock backrest in its upright position.

Index

Loading instructions
(Vehicle with enlarged cargo area)

The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle
depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore
recommended to load the vehicle according to the
illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against front or rear
seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept
as low as possible since it influences the handling
characteristics of the vehicle.
Note:
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
The enlarged cargo area should only be used for items
which do not fit in the trunk alone.

The total load weight including vehicle occupants and
luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity
weight indicated on the certification tag which can be
found on the left door pillar.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

209
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Interior equipment

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

210

Warning!

Cellular telephone

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.

The vehicle is prepared for the installation of a cellular
telephone. For further information and installation
contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether
or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the
driver should not use the cellular telephone while
the vehicle is in motion.

Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open while seat
backrest sections not locked in their upright
position. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.

Warning!

Stop the vehicle in a safe location before answering
or placing a call.

Index

Telephone, general

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.

Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/
her primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others, we recommend that you
pull over to a safe location and stop before placing
or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the hands-free
device and only use the telephone when road and
traffic conditions permit.

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being
connected to an external antenna) from inside the
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

Interior equipment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

See separate instruction manual for instructions on how
to operate the telephone.

211
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Garage door opener

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

212

Garage door opener

The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to
three separately controlled objects.
Warning!
When programming a garage door opener, the door
moves up or down.

When programming or operating the remote
control make sure there is no possibility of anyone
being harmed by the moving door.
Note:

1 Signal transmitter keys
2 Indicator lamp
3 Portable remote control transmitter

Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible
with the integrated opener. If you should experience
difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA
only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Index

Programming or reprogramming the integrated
remote control:

For operation in the USA only: This device complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:

1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the
device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches
(5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the
integrated remote control located on the inside rear
view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Garage door opener
Instruments
and controls

Operation

213
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Garage door opener
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the handheld transmitter button and the desired integrated
remote control button. Do not release the buttons
until completing step 4.
4. The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control
will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released (the rapid flashing lamp indicates
successful programming of the new frequency
signal). To program the remaining two buttons,
follow steps 1 through 4.
Note:
If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully
program the integrated remote control device to learn
the signal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door
opener could be equipped with the “rolling code
feature”.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

214
Rolling code programming:
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these
instructions after completing the “Programming”
portion of this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and easier.)
1. Locate training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. Exact location and color of the
button may vary by garage door opener brand. If
there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,
reference to garage door opener operator’s manual.
2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener
motor head unit (which activated the “training
light”).
Note:
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate
step 3.

Index

Canadian programming:

3. Firmly press and release the programmed
integrated remote control transmit button. Press
and release same button a second time to complete
the training process. (Some garage door openers
may required you to do this procedure a third time
to complete the training.)

During programming, your hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the integrated remote control transmitter button
(note steps 2 through 4 in the “Programming” portion)
while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until the frequency
signal has been learned. The indicator lamp will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.

4. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the
programmed button on the integrated remote
control transmitter.

Garage door opener
Instruments
and controls

Operation

215
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Garage door opener
Operation of remote control:

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

216
Erasing the remote control memory:

1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.

2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate
the remote controlled device. The integrated remote
control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.

2. Simultaneously holding down the left and right side
buttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the
control lamp blink rapidly, will erase the codes of all
three channels.

Index

Contents - Driving
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Automatic transmission ............... 234
Parking brake ................................ 243
Driving instructions ...................... 244
Drive sensibly – Save Fuel ....... 244
Drinking and driving ................ 244
Pedals .......................................... 244
Power assistance ........................ 245
Brakes .......................................... 245
Driving off ................................... 246
Parking ........................................ 246
Tires ............................................. 247
Snow chains ............................... 250
Winter driving
instructions ................................ 250

Deep water ..................................252
Passenger compartment ...........253
Traveling abroad ........................253
Cruise control .................................254
Brake assist system (BAS) ............257
Antilock brake system
(ABS) ...........................................258
Electronic stability program
(ESP) ...........................................260
What you should know at the gas
station .........................................264
Check regularly and before a long
trip ...............................................266

217
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Control and operation of radio transmitters

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

218

Control and operation of radio transmitters
COMAND, radio, telephone and two-way radio

Telephones and two-way radio

Warning!

Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate
the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data
System), radio, telephone1 or two-way radio1 if road
and traffic conditions permit.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a
citizens band unit should only be used inside the
vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is
installed on the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions
regarding use of an external antenna.

1 Observe all legal requirements.

Index

The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km)

Maintenance

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the
break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle
during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate
vehicle and engine speeds.

Approximately 30 days or 2000 miles (2000 km) prior
to the next recommended service, the remaining
distance or days are displayed in the multifunction
indicator. See Flexible service system (FSS) on
page 125.

During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle
driving) and excessive engine speeds.

We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle
serviced by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called
for by the FSS.

Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended
to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear.
We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1”
only at moderate speeds (for hill driving).

Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance
with the Service Booklet at the designated times/
mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually
increased to the permissible maximum.

The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km)
Instruments
and controls

Operation

219
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tele Aid

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

220
Tele Aid
Important!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be
performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button.
Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please
call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

System self-check
Initially, after turning the electronic key in starter
switch to position 2, malfunctions are detected and
indicated (the indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than 5 seconds or do not
come on).
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Important!

(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response;
automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information.
The Tele Aid system is always operational, providing
that the vehicle’s battery is charged and properly
connected. To activate, press the “SOS” button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or the Information
button ¡, depending on the type of response
required.

Always make sure that the indicator lamp in the
“SOS” button remains illuminated for approximately
5 seconds during the system self-check after turning
electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically following
an accident in which the Emergency Tensioning
Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy. An emergency call
can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next
to the inside rear view mirror labeled “SOS”, then

Index

The Tele Aid system is available if:

pressing the button (for longer than 2 seconds) located
under the cover. See below for instructions on initiating
an emergency call manually.

• it has been activated and is operational. Activation
requires a subscription for monitoring services and
cellular air time,

Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator
lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. The
message “EMERGENCY CALL – ESTABLISHING CALL”
appears in the multifunction display. When the
connection is established, the message “EMERGENCY
CALL – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the
multifunction display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location system),
vehicle model, identification number and color are
generated.

• the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals
are available.
Note:
Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the
vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite
network.
Warning!

A voice connection between the Response Center and
the occupants of the vehicle will be established
automatically soon after the emergency call has been
initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident provided they
can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.

If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button is
illuminated continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established,
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an
emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone
network is not available). The message
“EMERGENCY CALL – CALL FAILED” appears in
the multifunction display.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned
by other means.

Tele Aid
Instruments
and controls

221
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tele Aid

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

222
Initiating an emergency call

Manually:
Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open.

Press the emergency call switch (2) briefly (for longer
than 2 seconds). The indicator lamp in the emergency
call switch (2) will flash until the emergency call is
concluded. Wait for a voice connection to the Response
Center.
Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is
concluded.

Index

A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance
dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be
established. The nature of the need for assistance can
then be described. Sign and Drive services (jump start, a
few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare tire) are available.

Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in
a dangerous road location), please do not wait for
voice contact after you have pressed the emergency
button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a
safe location. The Response Center will
automatically contact local emergency officials
with the vehicle’s approximate location if they
receive an “SOS” signal and cannot make voice
contact with the vehicle occupants.

If the vehicle requires more than Sign and Drive
services, the Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your
vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center.
For other than Sign and Drive services, labor and/or
towing charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside
Assistance manual for more information.

Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside
Assistance button •. Pressing and holding the
button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to a
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher. The
button will flash while the call is in progress. The
Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color and location
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

Notes:
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
button • remains illuminated in red for
approximately 5 seconds during the system self-check
after turning electronic key in starter switch to
position 2 (together with the “SOS” button and the
Information button ¡).
See system self-check on page 220 when the indicator
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than
approximately 5 seconds.

Tele Aid
Instruments
and controls

223
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tele Aid

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

224
Information button ¡

Notes:

Located below the center armrest cover is the
Information button ¡. Pressing and holding the
button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to
the Client Assistance Center. The button will flash while
the call is in progress. The Tele Aid system will transmit
data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to availability of
cellular and GPS signals).

The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡
remains illuminated in red for approximately 5 seconds
during the system self-check after turning electronic
key in starter switch to position 2 (together with the
“SOS” button and the Roadside Assistance button •).

A voice connection between the Client Assistance
Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available
to you.
If you have chosen the Route Guidance Service (an
optional service available at additional cost in the USA
only), your communication will be transferred to our
Response Center, who will provide the appropriate
information.
For more details concerning this optional service,
please contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018.

See system self-check on page 220 when the indicator
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than
approximately 5 seconds.
Important!
If the indicator lamps do not illuminate or remain
illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has
detected a fault or the service is not currently active,
and may not initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz
Center and have the system checked or contact the
Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.

Index

Upgrade Signals

Important!

Tele Aid system processes calls using the following
priority.

If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system
does not reset, contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.

• Automatic emergency – First priority
• Manual emergency – Second priority
• Roadside assistance – Third priority
• Information – Fourth priority

Notes:
The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until
the call is concluded and this can only be completed by
a Response Center or Client Assistance Center
representative.

Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are
connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard,
and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain
information such as vehicle identification number or
client information is not available, the operator may
need to retransmit. During this time you will hear a
chirp and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is
complete. Once a call is concluded, a chirp will be heard,
the appropriate indicator lamp will stop flashing and a
tone will be heard indicating that the system has reset.

Tele Aid
Instruments
and controls

225
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tele Aid

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

226
Remote door unlock

Vehicle location/stolen vehicle tracking services

In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally
(e.g. key inside vehicle), and the reserve key is not
handy, contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada). You will be asked to provide your password
which you provided when you completed the subscriber
agreement.

Should you wish to locate your vehicle, contact the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). You will be
asked to provide your password which you provided
when you completed the subscriber agreement.

Then return to your vehicle and pull outside trunk
handle for a minimum of 20 seconds.
The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with
the remote door unlocking feature.
Note:
The remote door unlock feature is available if the
relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are
available.

In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident
to the police who will issue a numbered incident report.
Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center.
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly
contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. The electronic key
in the starter switch must be in position 1 or 2 and the
cellular and GPS signals must be available. The
Response Center will contact you at the phone
number(s) provided in the agreement once the vehicle
is located. The Response Center will attempt to contact
the vehicle until located, up to a maximum of 14 days or
until the vehicle location incident report is cancelled by
you.

Index

Important!

Starguide (except Canada)
(only vehicles with optional COMAND system)

Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for
communication and the GPS (Global Positioning
System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these
signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not
function and if this occurs, assistance must be
summoned by other means.

If you have chosen Starguide Service, you can request
several individual informations, for example the latest
news or stock market reports, information about
weather and travel or get your e-mail on the COMAND.
For notes on operation see separate COMAND operator’s
manual.

Warning!

For more details concerning this optional service,
please contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018
(in the USA).

Tele Aid
Instruments
and controls

If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button does not
illuminate during or remains illuminated after the
system self-check, have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

227
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Catalytic converter

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

228

Catalytic converter

Warning!

Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type
catalytic converters, an important element in
conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve
substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating
condition by following our recommended maintenance
instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet.

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate
this vehicle in areas where combustible materials
such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact
with the hot exhaust system, as these materials
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Caution!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only
premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should
be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned
fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to
overheat, which could start a fire.

Index

Emission control

Warning!

Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic
components of the exhaust gases within permissible
limits required by law.

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide,
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and
lead to death.

These systems, of course, will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should,
therefore, be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine
adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover,
the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details refer to the Service Booklet.

Emission control
Instruments
and controls

Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a
garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you
think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the
vehicle while driving, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately. If you must drive under
these conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open.

229
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Starter switch

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

230

Starter switch

key or with the electronic key in starter switch
position 0, the selector lever is locked in
position “P”.
1 Gear selector lever is unlocked.
Most electrical consumers can be operated. For
detailed information see respective subjects.
2 Driving position.
3 Starting position.
See page 232 for instructions on starting and stopping
the engine.
Warning!

0 The electronic key can be withdrawn in this position
only. The steering is locked when the electronic key
is removed from the starter switch. If necessary,
move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking
mechanism to engage.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
electronic key can be removed only with the selector
lever in position “P”. After removing the electronic

When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.

Index

Important!

Notes:

If the electronic key is left in the starter switch
position 0 for a extended period of time, it can no longer
be turned in the lock. In this case, remove electronic key
from starter switch and reinsert.

A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened
with the electronic key is in starter switch position 1
or 0.
With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the
alternator (output) is limited.

Caution!

It is therefore recommended that you turn off
unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stopand-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of
the battery.

To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible
dead battery, always remove the electronic key from the
starter switch. Do not leave the electronic key in starter
switch position 0.

Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system
may be minimized by turning off the following power
consumers, for example:
Heated seats, rear window defroster. In addition, the
automatic climate air volume control should be set to
the lowest position.

Starter switch
Instruments
and controls

231
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Starting and turning off the enginge

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

232

Starting and turning off the engine

Vehicles with manual transmission:

Before starting

Do not depress accelerator. Fully depress clutch pedal,
otherwise the engine cannot be started due to the
integrated safety interlock.

Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector
lever is in position “P” or “N” (gearshift lever in
neutral). Turn electronic key in starter switch to
position 2.

Turn electronic key in starter switch clockwise to the
stop. Release only when the engine is firing regularly.
Important!

Starting
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not depress accelerator. Briefly turn electronic key in
starter switch clockwise to the stop and release. The
starter will engage until the engine is running.
If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops,
turn electronic key completely to the left and repeat
starting the engine.
After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system
checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Due to the installed starter non-repeat feature, the
electronic key must be turned completely to the left
before attempting to start the engine again.
In areas where temperatures frequently drop below -4°F
(-20°C) we recommend that an engine block heater be
installed. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
advise you on this subject, see page 251.
Turning off
Turn the electronic key in the starter switch to
position 0 to stop the engine.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The electronic key can only be removed with the
selector lever in position “P”.

Index

Manual transmission

Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into reverse;
to shift into reverse, pull the gearshift lever up.
Do not exceed the maximum engine speed in the
individual gears. Refer to tachometer (see page 91) for
engine speeds.
Important!
When vehicle is parked, always be sure to engage first
or reverse gear and firmly set parking brake.
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel
towards the road curb.
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the engine
can result in transmission damage that is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not exceed engine speed limits, see page 91.
Warning!
On slippery road surfaces as well as high engine
speeds, never downshift in order to obtain braking
action. This could result in drive wheel slip and
reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.

See illustration for gearshift lever positions
corresponding to the individual gears.

Manual transmission
Instruments
and controls

Operation

233
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

234
The automatic transmission selects individual gears
automatically, dependent upon
• Selector lever position
• Program mode selector
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted,
dependent on the driving style, the driving situation
and the road characteristics.
Important!
When parking the vehicle or before working on the
vehicle with the engine running, firmly depress the
parking brake pedal and shift the selector lever into “P”.

Index

Driving

Important!

The selector lever is automatically locked while in
position “P”. To move the selector lever out of
position “P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly
depressed before the shift lock will release.

After selecting any driving position from “N” or “P”,
wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before
accelerating, especially when the engine is cold.

Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the service brake is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive.
The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the
selector lever is in drive or reverse position.

Accelerator position
Partial throttle = early upshifting = normal acceleration
Full throttle = later upshifting = rapid acceleration
Kickdown (depressing the accelerator beyond full
throttle) = downshifting to a lower gear = maximum
acceleration. Once the desired speed is attained, ease up
on the accelerator — the transmission shifts up again.

Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P”
or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward on in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when your
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Automatic transmission
Instruments
and controls

Operation

235
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic transmission
Stopping
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the
transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service
brake.
For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N”
or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

236
Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the
ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to
come on. Turn off and restart the engine to clear the
malfunction indication.
Warning!

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not
hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids
unnecessary transmission heat build up.

Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever
not fully engaged in position “P” is dangerous.
Also, when parked on an incline, position “P” alone
may not prevent your vehicle from moving,
possibly hitting people or objects.

Maneuvering

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting
to position “P”, see page 243 for parking brake.

To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a
parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never
abruptly step on the accelerator.
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying
slight partial throttle.

When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel
against curb.

Index

Park position

Selector lever position

The park position is to be used when parking the
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped.
The park position is not intended to serve as a
brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always use the parking brake in
addition to placing the selector lever in park to
secure the vehicle.
Note:
The electronic key can only be removed from the
starter switch with the selector lever in
position “P”. With the electronic key removed, the
selector lever is locked in position “P”.
Reverse gear

1 Program mode indicator,
see page 241

Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle
stopped.

2 Gear range indicators

Dependent on the program mode selector switch
position “S” or “W” the maximum speed in the
reverse gear is different. However, it is not
possible to change the program mode while in
reverse.

The current selector lever position is highlighted in the
gear range indicator display (2), as well as shown by a
red indicator light next to the gear selector lever. The
automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to
specific operating conditions using the selector lever.

Automatic transmission
Instruments
and controls

Operation

237
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic transmission

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

238

Neutral

Gear selection for special circumstances

No power is transmitted from the engine to the
drive axle. When the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do
not engage “N” while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on
icy roads, see page 250 for winter driving
instructions).

The transmission gear ranges for special circumstances
can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the
right or the left with the selector lever in position “D”.

Important!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with selector lever in “N” can result in
transmission damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The transmission automatically upshifts through
5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.

The gear range currently selected is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
Briefly press selector lever in the ç direction:
The transmission downshifts, one gear at a time, in the
order “4”, “3”, “2”, “1”.
Press and hold selector lever in the ç direction:
The selector lever position display will switch to the
gear range currently selected by the automatic
transmission.
The transmission will only shift down one gear if the
gear range currently selected has already shifted to its
highest possible gear.
Briefly press selector lever in the æ direction:
The transmission will shift from the current gear range
to the next higher gear range. If the transmission is
already in gear range “D”, an additional upshift of one
gear is possible.

Index

Press and hold selector lever in the æ direction:
The transmission will shift from the current gear
directly to gear range “D”.

The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds
below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine
temperatures below 95°F (35°C).
To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever
is moved to a lower gear range, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear, if the engine’s revolutions per
minute limit would be exceeded. In this case there will
be no downshift, even when the vehicle speed reaches
the engine’s rpm limit of that gear, e.g. by applying the
service brakes.

Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your
vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of
control.

To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when
driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily
loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when
necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best
torque range.

Important!
With transmission in gear range “D”, “4” or “3”,
upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed
depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature.
This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperatures.
During the brief warm-up period this delayed upshift
and increased engine noise might be perceived as a
malfunction. However, neither the engine nor
transmission are negatively affected by this mode of
operation.

Automatic transmission
Instruments
and controls

Operation

239
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic transmission
Gear ranges:
Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for
performance driving.
Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for
moderately steep hills. Since the transmission
does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear
selection will allow use of the engine’s braking
power downhill.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

240
Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in
mountainous regions or under extreme operating
conditions. This gear selection will allow use of
the engine’s braking power when descending
steep grades.
Use this position, which makes maximum use of
the engine’s braking effect, while descending
very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at
speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).

Index

Program mode selector switch

Standard mode
Press switch. “S” is displayed in the gear range
indicator display, see page 237. Use this mode for
all regular driving.
The vehicle starts out in 1st gear.
Accelerator Operation:
Fast on = depressing the accelerator pedal quickly
(not into kickdown position) while driving
continuously, rather than depressing the
accelerator pedal in the usual manner, will cause
the automatic transmission to shift down into a
lower gear. This gear shifting process is
dependent on the current vehicle speed.
Fast off = there will be no upshift when releasing
the accelerator pedal quickly, e.g. using the
engine’s braking power during performance
driving.

The transmission is provided with a selector switch (1)
for Standard “S” and Winter/Wet (snow and ice) “W”
program modes.
The program mode currently selected is indicated in the
gear range indicator display.

Automatic transmission
Instruments
and controls

Operation

241
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Automatic transmission
W

Winter/Wet (snow and ice) mode
Press switch. “W” is displayed in the gear range
indicator display, see page 237. The vehicle starts
out in 2nd gear, except with selector lever in 1st
gear, or with accelerator pedal in kick-down
position.
The “W” mode helps to improve traction and
driving stability of the vehicle.
The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle
and engine speeds than in the “S” program mode.

Caution!
Never change the program mode when the selector lever
is out of position “P”. It could result in a change of
driving characteristics for which you may not be
prepared.
Important!
Always be certain of the program mode selected since
the vehicle driving characteristics change with the
selection of the program mode.
Dependent on the program mode selector switch
position “S” or “W” and the gear selector lever in
position “R”, the ratio of power transmission changes.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

242
Emergency operation
(Limp home mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating
in Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a
malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be
accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on.
In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be
activated.
To engage 2nd gear or reverse:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move selector lever to position “P”.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or
move selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear).
Have the transmission checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Index

Parking brake

To engage, firmly depress parking brake pedal. When
the electronic key is in starter switch position 2, the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should
come on brightly.
To release the parking brake, pull handle on instrument
panel. The brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster should go out.
A warning sounds and the parking brake warning
message appears in the multifunction display
(see page 279), if you start to drive without having
released the parking brake.
Also see brake warning lamp on page 270.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident or serious injury.

Parking brake
Instruments
and controls

243
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving instructions

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

244

Driving instructions

Drinking and driving

Drive sensibly – Save Fuel

Warning!

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving
habits and operating conditions.

Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very
dangerous combination. Even a small amount of
alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.

To save fuel you should:
• keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures,
• remove unnecessary loads,
• remove roof rack when not in use,
• allow engine to warm up under low load use,

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is
sharply increased when you drink or take drugs
and drive.
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs.

• avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration,
• have all maintenance work performed at regular
intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold
weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly
country.

Pedals
Warning!
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects
stored in this area may impair pedal movement.

Index

Power assistance

The condition of the parking brake system is checked
each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required
maintenance service.

Warning!
When the engine is not running, the brake and
steering systems are without power assistance.
Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is
necessary to stop or steer the vehicle.

If the parking brake is released and the brake warning
lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid
level in the reservoir is too low.

Brakes

Have the brake system inspected at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.

Warning!

All checks and service work on the brake system should
be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the
reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.

After driving in heavy rain for some time without
applying the brakes or through water deep enough
to wet brake components, the first braking action
may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal
pressure may be necessary to obtain expected
braking effect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
from vehicles in front.

Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake fluid
is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be
degraded to an extent that safe braking is
substantially impaired. This could result in an
accident.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause
excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby
significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may
not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time
to avoid an accident.
Driving instructions
Instruments
and controls

Operation

245
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving instructions
Caution!
When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the
load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use
the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some
time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream
will cool down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road
is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on
the engine until the operating temperature has been
reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one
drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP
switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

246
Parking
Warning!
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of
vehicle movement, before turning off the engine
and leaving the vehicle always:
1. Keep right foot on service brake pedal.
2. Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
3. Move the selector lever to position “P”
(manual transmission: first or reverse gear).
4. Slowly release service brake pedal.
5. Turn front wheels towards the road curb.
6. Turn the electronic key to starter switch
position 0 and remove.
7. Take the electronic key and lock vehicle when
leaving.

Index

Tires

Important!
It is advisable to set the parking brake whenever
parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move
selector lever to position “P” (manual transmission: first
or reverse gear). When parking on hills, always set the
parking brake.

Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride
disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the
hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and
drive with caution to an area which is a safe
distance from the roadway.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible
damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have
it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
tire dealer for repairs.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These
indicators are located in six places on the tread
circumference and become visible at a tread depth of
approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is
considered worn and should be replaced.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across
the tread.

Driving instructions
Instruments
and controls

Operation

247
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving instructions

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

248
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This
applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high
loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient
temperatures).
Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose
control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat
tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will
cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Aquaplaning

Warning!
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. As
tread depth approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply
reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road surface
(conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road,
aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with
new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in
the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.

Index

Tire traction

Tire speed rating

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is
always lower than on a dry road.

Vehicles without Sport Package:
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “H”-rated tires,
which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h).

You should pay particular attention to the condition of
the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to
the freezing point.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from
exceeding the speed rating.

Warning!

If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be
substantially reduced. Under such weather
conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme
caution.

Even when permitted by law, never operate a
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed
rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are
rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of
vehicle control and resulting in personal injury
and possible death.

We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter
season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can
reduce your stopping distance as compared with
summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is not snow or
ice covered.

Driving instructions
Instruments
and controls

Operation

249
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving instructions

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

250

Snow chains

Winter driving instructions

Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.

The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to
drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking
and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.

Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow
the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered
roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on
roads without snow.
When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control
switch to OFF, refer to page 262.

When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move
selector lever to position “N” or in case of manual
transmission declutch. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking
efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary
to produce the normal brake effect. We therefore
recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can
bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to
normal. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done
without endangering other drivers on the road.

Index

Winter driving

If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated
roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as
possible after driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.

Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before the onset of winter.
• Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil
which is not approved for winter operation. For
viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity,
see page 357.

Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure
that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around the vehicle with engine running.
Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.

• Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration.
• Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for below freezing
temperatures, see page 302.

To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a
window slightly on the side of the vehicle not
facing the wind.

• Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing
ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps
to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low
ambient temperatures.

Driving instructions
Instruments
and controls

Operation

251
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving instructions
• Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on
all four wheels for the winter season. Observe
permissible maximum speed for M+S rated
radial-ply tires and the legal speed limit.
Note:
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the
antilock brake system (ABS) and electronic stability
program (ESP) can only be achieved with M+S rated
radial-ply tires and/or snow chains recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Snow chains maximize performance.
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

252
Deep water
Caution!
Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown
depth.
If you must drive through deep water, drive slowly to
prevent water from entering the engine compartment or
passenger compartment, being ingested by the air
intake, possibly causing damage to electrical
components or wiring, to engine or transmission that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Index

Passenger compartment

Traveling abroad
Abroad, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service
network at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas
which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz
Center directory, you should request pertinent
information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely as
possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.

Driving instructions
Instruments
and controls

Operation

253
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving systems
Cruise control

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

254
1 Accelerate and set:
Lift lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever up to
accelerate.
2 Decelerate and set:
Depress lever briefly to set speed.
Hold lever down to decelerate.
Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired
speed with the accelerator.
Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to
position 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be
released.

The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed
manner, for example over long distances, as it
automatically maintains the set speed by actively
regulating the throttle setting.
Any given speed above approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by
operating the lever.

The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by
using the accelerator. After the accelerator is
released, the previously set speed will be resumed
automatically.
If a set speed is to be increased or decreased
slightly, e. g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in
position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or
briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for
increases or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
increments. When the lever is released, the newly
set speed remains.

Index

4 Resume

3 Canceling

If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when
driving at a speed exceeding approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which
was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise
control.

To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to
position 3.
When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle
speed drops below approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h), for example when driving upgrade, the
cruise control will be canceled.

The last memorized speed is canceled when the
electronic key in the starter switch is turned to
position 1 or 0.

If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains
inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the
system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Important!
Moving gear selector lever to position “N” switches the
cruise control off.

Driving systems
Instruments
and controls

255
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving systems

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

256

Warning!

Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Only use the cruise control if the traffic and
weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a
steady speed.

Downshift occurs (max. to 3rd gear) to maintain the set
cruise controlled speed by using the engine’s braking
power.

• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.

As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission
shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position.

• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.

The set cruise controlled speed is switched off when
declutching exceeds four seconds during downshifting a
gear.

The “Resume” function should only be operated if
the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed
and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.
Notes:
If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently
while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the
cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the
following will assist in maintaining the set cruise
controlled speed:

Vehicles with manual transmission:

Nevertheless, in some cases you may have to step on the
brake pedal to slow down. In this case the cruise control
is switched off.
Use the lever to resume the previously set speed.

Index

Brake assist system (BAS)

Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum
BAS assistance.

Warning!

To receive the benefit of the system you must apply
continuous full braking power during the stopping
sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.

BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.

Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
If the BAS warning message is displayed, a malfunction
has been detected in the system. The brake system
functions in the usual manner, but without BAS.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS is also switched
off.
If a BAS warning message is displayed, have the BAS
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers by
having maximum power boost applied to the brakes
more quickly in emergency braking conditions than
might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s
braking style. This can help reduce braking distances
over what ordinary driving and braking style might do.
The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS).

Driving systems
Instruments
and controls

257
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving systems
Antilock brake system (ABS)
Warning!
Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake
pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly
reduces braking effectiveness.
Important!
The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during
hard braking maneuvers.
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a
vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
independent of road surface conditions.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

258
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal,
indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep
firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while
experiencing the pulsation.
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in
applying the advantages of the ABS, namely braking
power and ability to steer the vehicle.
In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep
continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this
manner only can the ABS be most effective.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even
with light brake pedal pressure because of the
increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.

Index

If the ABS malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated,
have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

ABS control
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the
instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in
starter switch position 2 and should go out with the
engine running.

Warning!
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of a ABS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.

When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on while the engine is
running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a
malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake
system functions in the usual manner, but without
antilock assistance.
For ABS malfunction indicator lamp, see page 272.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on
with the engine running.
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the
ABS is operational.

Driving systems
Instruments
and controls

Note:
To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions
you discover, operate your hazard warning flashers as
appropriate.

259
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving systems
Electronic stability program (ESP)
Warning!
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces
driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving
conditions.
Over/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a
countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also
limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the
speedometer dial, starts to flash when ESP is in
operation.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

260
Important!
If the ESP warning lamp v flashes:
• During take-off apply as little throttle as possible.
• While driving ease up on the accelerator.
• Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
• Do not switch off the ESP.
Caution!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see
page 321, “Towing the vehicle”), the engine must be
shut off (electronic key in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and
will apply the rear wheel brakes.

Index

When testing the parking brake on a brake test
dynamometer, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise,
the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the
rear wheel brakes.

Notes:
The yellow ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer
dial comes on with the electronic key in starter switch
position 2. It should go out with the engine running.
If the ESP warning message is displayed, a malfunction
has been detected in the system. Pressing the
accelerator pedal will require greater effort. Only partial
engine output will be available.

In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the
ESP is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended
M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains.

Have the ESP checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Synchronizing ESP
If the power supply was interrupted (battery
disconnected or empty), the ESP warning message may
be displayed with the engine running.

For ESP warning message, see page 273.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP is also switched
off.

Turn steering wheel completely to the left and then to
the right. The ESP warning message should go out.

Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the
wheels to rotate at different speeds, therefore the ESP
may activate (yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer
dial comes on). For this reason, all wheels, including the
spare wheel, must have the same tire size.

Driving systems
Instruments
and controls

261
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Driving systems

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

262

ESP control switch

To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
switch off ESP by pressing the upper half (1) of the ESP
switch. The ESP warning lamp v located in the
speedometer dial, is continuously illuminated.
Warning!
When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated
continuously, the ESP is switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
P42.45-2245-26

ESP control switch located on center console.
1 Press to switch ESP off
ESP warning lamp v in located in speedometer
dial comes on.
2 Press to switch ESP on
ESP warning lamp v in located in speedometer
dial goes out.

With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
A portion of the ESP system remains active, even with
the switch in the OFF position.
If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the
brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient
traction. The traction control engages at vehicle speeds
up to approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and switches
off at 50 mph (80 km/h).

Index

Notes:

Important!

Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause
serious damage to the drive train which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

If the ESP warning lamp flashes:
• During take-off, apply as little throttle as possible.
• While driving, ease up on the accelerator.

The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial,
starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
ESP: press lower half (2) of the switch (the ESP warning
lamp in the speedometer dial goes out).

Driving systems
Instruments
and controls

263
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

What you should know at the gas station
What you should know at the gas station
Fuel supply

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

264
Open flap by pushing near front (arrow). Turn fuel cap
to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in
tank has been released, then remove cap. Failure to
remove slowly could result in personal injury.
See page 335 for manual release of fuel filler flap.
Fuel
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully
insert filler nozzle unit.
Only fill fuel tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out
– do not top up or overfill.
Warning!

Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It
burns violently and can cause serious injury.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling
fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking
materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking
materials near gasoline!

Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating
pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge such as the gas spraying back out upon
removing the filler nozzle which could cause
personal injury.
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can
cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see
page 268 for notes on the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp.

Index

Spark plugs

Fuel tank capacity approximately 16.4 US gal (62.0 l).
This includes approximately 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) reserve.

Approved spark plugs, refer to “Technical Data”.

Use premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane Index 91 (Average of 96 RON/86 MON).

Air conditioner

Engine oil

R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant, refer to
“Technical Data”.

Checking oil level, see instructions on page 128
and 300.

Bulbs
High and low beams: H7 (55 W),
low beam: Xenon (optional)
fog lamps: H B4 (55 W),
turn signal lamps,
front 1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp),
parking and standing lamps, front: W 5W (5 W)
side marker lamps, front: 5 W/4 cp,
turn signal lamps, rear: PY 21 W bulb (yellow),
stop lamps: P 21 W/32 cp bulb,
rear fog lamp, driver’s side: P 21 W/32 cp bulb,
tail, parking, standing and
side marker lamp: R 5 W/4 cp,
backup lamps: 21 W/32 cp,
license plate lamps: 5 W/4 cp

Recommended engine oils, see Approved Service
Products sheet.
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water
quality). For further information refer to page 301.
Tire pressure
For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside the
fuel filler flap. See page 315 for further details.

What you should know at the gas station
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

265
Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Instrument
cluster display

Driving

Check regularly and before a long trip

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

266

Check regularly and before a long trip

1 Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system
For refilling reservoir see page 302.
2 Coolant level,
see “Coolant level” on page 301

3
2

3 Brake fluid,
see “Brake fluid” on page 357
Opening hood, see page 297.
Vehicle lighting: Check function and cleanliness. For
replacement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on
page 326.
Exterior lamp switch, see page 130.

Index

Contents - Instrument cluster display
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Malfunction and indicator lamp in
the center console .................... 273
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .... 273
Malfunction and warning messages
in the multifunction display ....274
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE ................ 275
BATTERY / ALTERNATOR ........276
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM .... 277
BRAKE ASSIST ........................... 277
BRAKE LINING WEAR .............. 278
BRAKE FLUID ............................ 278
PARKING BRAKE ....................... 279
SEAT BELT SYSTEM .................. 279
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
(Electronic stability program) . 280
COOLANT (coolant level) ......... 281

COOLANT
(coolant temperature) ................282
ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................283
LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................284
LIGHT SENSOR ...........................286
DOOR ...........................................286
TRUNK OPEN .............................287
HOOD ...........................................287
TELEPHONE – FUNCTION .......288
TELE AID .....................................288
WASHER FLUID .........................289
RESTRAINT SYSTEM .................290
KEY ...............................................290
FUEL RESERVE .......................... 291
UNDERVOLTAGE ........................ 291
STEER. WHEEL ADJUST. ...........292
ENTRANCE POSITION ..............292

267
Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and indicator lamps
Malfunction and indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up
during the bulb self-check when turning the electronic
key in steering lock to position 2, have it checked and
replaced if necessary.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic
components of the exhaust gases within permissible
limits required by law.
These systems, of course, will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should,
therefore, be carried out only by authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center qualified technicians. Engine
adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover,
the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details refer to the Service Booklet.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

268
Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide,
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and
lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a
garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you
think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the
vehicle while driving, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately. If you must drive under
these conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open.
On-board diagnostic system
Check engine malfunction indicator lamp
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the
“CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator
lamp comes on when the engine is running,
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management
system, emission control system, systems which impact
emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the
fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated
continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you

Index

may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we
recommend that you have the system checked at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp
comes on, have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is flashing and/or the
vehicle is not driving normally (e.g. malfunction of the
fuel management system or running out of fuel), serious
damage can occur to the emission system. Please
contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.

With some exceptions, the control module switches off
the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the
condition, causing the lamp to come on, no longer exists
during three consecutive cycles.
An on-board diagnostic connector is located in the
passenger compartment near to the parking brake
pedal, allowing the accurate identification of system
malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes.

The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control
module monitors emission control components that
either provide input signals to or receive output signals
from the control module. Malfunctions resulting from
interruptions or failure of any of these components are
indicated by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are
simultaneously stored in the SFI control module.

Malfunction and indicator lamps
Instruments
and controls

Operation

269
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and indicator lamps
Brake warning lamp
Except Canada
Canada only
When the brake warning lamp and message appear
while the engine is running, this means:

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

270
Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated
can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately if the brake warning lamp
stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.

• there is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir
(engine running and parking brake released), or

Note:

• the parking brake is set (engine running).

If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid
reservoir is reached, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.

Index

Fuel reserve warning

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp
The operational readiness of the airbag
system is verified by the indicator lamp
“SRS” in the instrument cluster when
turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go out after
approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes out, the
system continues to monitor the components and
circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a
malfunction by coming on again.
Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which could
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also
result in injury.

P54.30-3609-26

1 Fuel reserve indicator
When the warning lamp (1) comes on after starting the
engine, or if comes on while driving, it indicates that
the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of
approximately 2.1 US gal (8 liters).
See page 264 for notes on refueling the vehicle.

See page 65 for notes on airbags, see page 63 for belt
tensioners and page 55 for infant and child seat
restraint.
Malfunction and indicator lamps
Instruments
and controls

Operation

271
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and indicator lamps
ABS malfunction indicator lamp
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on with the
electronic key in starter switch position 2
and should go out with the engine running.
ABS

When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp symbol and
warning in the instrument cluster remains illuminated
while the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS
has detected a malfunction and has switched off. In this
case, the brake system functions in the usual manner,
but without antilock assistance.
A malfunctioning ABS control unit can possibly affect
the operation of other systems (e.g. Navigation,
Automatic transmission). Be guided accordingly with
respect to the use of those systems and have the system
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

272
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also
switched off. The malfunction indicator lamps and
malfunction messages in the multifunction display
come on with the engine running.
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the
ABS is operational.
Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
See page 258 for notes on antilock brake system (ABS).

Index

Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center
console

Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp
The yellow ESP warning lamp in the
speedometer dial comes on with the
electronic key in starter switch position 2.
It should go out with engine running.

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
The ü indicator lamp will light up for approximately
6 seconds when you turn the electronic key in starter
switch to position 1 or 2.

If the ESP malfunction indicator lamp remains
illuminated with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the system. Pressing the accelerator
pedal will require greater effort. Only partial engine
output will be available.

It does not light up if there is a fault in the system.
The ü indicator lamp stays lit as long as a
Baby SmartTM child seat is properly installed on the
front passenger seat. It indicates that the front
passenger airbag is switched off.

See electronic stability program (ESP) on page 260 if the
warning lamp lights up or flashes when the vehicle is
moving.

See page 62 for BabySmartTM airbag and its deactivation
system.

Seat belt nonusage warning lamp
With the electronic key in starter switch
position 2, the seat belt nonusage warning
lamp comes on, and a warning sounds for a
short time if the drivers seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the engine, the seat belt nonusage
warning lamp blinks for a brief period to remind the
driver and passengers to fasten seat belts.

Baby SmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

Malfunction and indicator lamps
Instruments
and controls

Operation

273
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages
Malfunction and warning messages in the
multifunction display
Malfunction and warning messages for the following
systems will be displayed immediately in the
multifunction display.
They are divided into three categories.
Category C1:

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

274
Note:
Certain malfunction and warning messages are
accompanied by an audible signal.
Malfunction and warning messages in red are always
accompanied by an audible signal.
Temporary messages such as “TRUNK OPEN!” will not
be stored in the malfunction message memory.

Messages of most immediate priority.
These cannot be cleared from the instrument cluster
using the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see
page 90).
Categories C2 and C3:
Messages of less immediate priority.
These can be cleared from the instrument cluster using
the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see page 90)
and are then stored in the malfunction message
memory. See page 109

Warning!
All categories of messages contain important
information which should be taken note of and,
where malfunction indicated, addressed as soon as
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty, or result in property damage or personal
injury.

Index

DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems)

DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit)

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

VISIT WORKSHOP!

DISPLAY FAULTY

VISIT WORKSHOP!

DISPLAY FAULTY

* C = Category, see page 274

This message is displayed to indicate that the
information being relayed by the engine control unit is
no longer complete. The display for coolant temperature
gauge, tachometer, or the cruise control may have failed.

The displays for several systems have failed. Some
systems themselves may also have failed.

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

275
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

276

BATTERY /ALTERNATOR

This message indicates a malfunction which must be
repaired immediately.
It may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should
this condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced
before continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine.
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message
displayed.

Line 1

Line 2

BATTERY/ALTERNATOR

VISIT WORKSHOP!

* C = Category, see page 274

Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Index

ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BRAKE ASSIST

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

ABS SYSTEM

VISIT WORKSHOP!

BRAKE ASSIST

NOT AVAILABLE!

DISPLAY DEFECTIVE

VISIT WORKSHOP!1

BRAKE ASSIST

VISIT WORKSHOP!

DISPLAY DEFECTIVE

VISIT WORKSHOP!

* C = Category, see page 274
* C = Category, see page 274

See page 258 for notes on the antilock brake system
(ABS).

A malfunction has been detected in the system. The
brake system functions in the usual manner, but
without brake assist system (BAS).

1 The display or the system is malfunctioning

See page 257 for notes on the brake assist system (BAS).

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

277
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

278
BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE LINING WEAR

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

BRAKE LINING WEAR

VISIT WORKSHOP!

BRAKE FLUID

VISIT WORKSHOP!

* C = Category, see page 274

When this message appears during braking, it indicates
that the brake pads are worn down.

Warning!

Have the brake system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Driving with this message displayed can result in
an accident. Have your brake system checked
immediately. Don’t add brake fluid before checking
the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid
reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.

PARKING BRAKE

SEAT BELT SYSTEM

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

PARKING BRAKE

ENGAGE BRAKE!

SEAT BELT SYSTEM

VISIT WORKSHOP!

PARKING BRAKE

RELEASE BRAKE!

PASSENGER SEAT BELT

FASTEN SEAT BELT!

DRIVER SEAT BELT

FASTEN SEAT BELT!

* C = Category, see page 274
* C = Category, see page 274

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

279
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

280

ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
(Electronic stability program)

1 The enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and the torque
reduction feature are unavailable.
2 This message may be displayed if the power supply was
interrupted (battery disconnected or empty). Synchronize ESP, see
page 261
3 The system is temporarily unavailable. The reason could be that
the self-diagnosis has not been completed. The display will clear
itself after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph (2o km/h).
4 The system is unavailable due to low voltage, e.g. battery not being
charged.

Line 1

Line 2

ELEC. STABIL. PROG.

NOT AVAILABLE!1, 2, 3, 4

ELEC. STABIL. PROG.

VISIT WORKSHOP!1, 5

DISPLAY DEFECTIVE

VISIT WORKSHOP!6

5 A malfunction has been detected in the system. In case of ESP
malfunction the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster
illuminates and the ESP switch in the center console does not
function. If in addition the ABS is malfunctioning, only partial
engine output will be available.
6 The display or the system is malfunctioning.

* C = Category, see page 274

Index

COOLANT (coolant level)

The low engine coolant level warning should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have
the cooling system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Note:

Line 1

Line 2

COOLANT

CHECK LEVEL!

Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving,
see page 124.
See page 302 for instructions on topping up the coolant.

* C = Category, see page 274

When this message appears while driving, the coolant
level has dropped below the required level. If no leaks
are noticeable and the engine temperature does not
increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station
and have coolant added to the coolant system.

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
You can be seriously burned.

281
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

282

COOLANT (coolant temperature)

Line 1

Line 2

COOLANT

STOP, ENGINE OFF!1

COOLANT

VISIT WORKSHOP!2

* C = Category, see page 274
1 This may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should this
condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced before continuing
to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to
an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the
engine. Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message
displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
2 The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. Observe the coolant
temperature gauge. See page 124

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious
burns and can occur just by opening the engine
hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.

Index

ENGINE OIL LEVEL

3 There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter. The
engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil level
indicator on page 128.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level.
Check the engine oil level immediately. See Engine oil level
indicator on page 128 and check the engine for visible leakage
(loss of oil).
It may be that there is water in the engine oil. Have the engine oil
checked.
5 The measuring system is malfunctioning.

Line 1

Line 2

ENGINE OIL LEVEL

CHECK LEVEL!1

ENGINE OIL LEVEL

STOP, ENGINE OFF!2

ENGINE OIL LEVEL

REDUCE OIL LEVEL13

ENGINE OIL

VISIT WORKSHOP!4

ENGINE OIL LEVEL

VISIT WORKSHOP!5

When the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK LEVEL!”
message appears while the engine is running and at
operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped
to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.
When this occurs, the warning will first come on
intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops
further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest
service station where the engine oil should be topped to
the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.

* C = Category, see page 274.

The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored.
Extended driving with the symbol displayed could
result in serious engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

1 The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil
level indicator on page 128.
2 There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

283
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

284

LIGHTING SYSTEM

Line 1

Line 2

TURN SIGNAL F, R

CHECK LAMP!

BRAKE LIGHT2

VISIT WORKSHOP!

BRAKE LIGHT, L3

CHECK LAMP!

BRAKE LIGHT, R3

CHECK LAMP!

3RD STOP LAMP 3

CHECK LAMP!

Line 1

Line 2

HIGH BEAM, L

CHECK LAMP!

LOW BEAM,L

CHECK LAMP!

HIGH BEAM, R

CHECK LAMP!

LOW BEAM,R

CHECK LAMP!

LICENSE PLATE L, L

CHECK LAMP!

DISPLAY DEFECTIVE

VISIT WORKSHOP!1

LICENSE PLATE L, R

CHECK LAMP!

TURN SIGNAL, L

CHECK LAMP!

LIGHTS

SWITCH OFF LIGHTS!

TURN SIGNAL, R

CHECK LAMP!

AUTOM. LIGHT ON

REMOVE KEY!

L. TURN SIG. RFLECTR

CHECK LAMP!

FRONT FOGLAMP, L

CHECK LAMP!

R. TURN SIG. RFLECTR

CHECK LAMP!

FRONT FOGLAMP, R

CHECK LAMP!

TURN SIGNAL F, L

CHECK LAMP!

REAR FOGLAMP

CHECK LAMP!

In the case of bulb failures in certain lamps, other lamps
will substitute. See page 326 for instructions on
replacing bulbs.

Line 1

Line 2

REAR FOGLAMP

SWITCH OFF
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4

REVERSE LIGHT, L

CHECK LAMP!

REVERSE LIGHT, R

CHECK LAMP!

TAIL LIGHT, L

CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4

TAIL LIGHT, R

CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4

3 The brake lamp comprises several light emitting diodes. The
warning message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.

SIDELIGHT, L

CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4

4 Other bulbs will be brought into use as replacements when certain
lamps blow.

SIDELIGHT, R

CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4

* C = Category, see page 274
1 The display or the system is malfunctioning.

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

2 The brake lamps are switching on after a delay or are permanently
on – visit workshop immediately.

285
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

286
DOOR

LIGHT SENSOR

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

LIGHT SENSOR

VISIT WORKSHOP!

DOOR OPEN!

* C = Category, see page 274

The headlamps will be switched on automatically if the
light sensor malfunctions.
The “LIGHTING” setting menu can be set to “MANUAL”
in the individual settings. See page 117. It will then be
possible to switch the headlamps on and off using the
exterior lamp switch. See page 130 for notes on the
exterior lamp switch.

* C = Category, see page 274.

Line 2

C*
1

TRUNK OPEN

Line 1

HOOD

Line 2

TRUNK OPEN!

Line 1

ENGINE HOOD OPEN!

* C = Category, see page 274

Line 2

C*
2

* C = Category, see page 274.

See page 297 for hood.

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

287
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

288
TELE AID

TELEPHONE – FUNCTION

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

FUNCTION

NOT AVAILABLE!

TELE AID

VISIT WORKSHOP!1

* C = Category, see page 274.

The display appears if button í or ì on the
multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle
is not equipped with a telephone.

1 The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response; automatic
and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. With
this message displayed, one or more functions may not be
available.
See page 220 for notes on the Tele Aid.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

WASHER FLUID

When this message appears while the engine is
running, the level of the reservoir has dropped to
approximately 1/3 of the total volume. The reservoir
should be refilled with the prescribed mixture of MB
Windshield washer concentrate and water or the
concentrate and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on
ambient temperature, at the next opportunity. The
reservoir for the windshield and headlamp washer
systems is located in the engine compartment.

Line 1

Line 2

WASHER FLUID

CHECK LEVEL!

See windshield and headlamp washer system on
page 302 for instructions on topping up the washer
fluid.

* C = Category, see page 274.

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

289
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

290
KEY

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

VISIT WORKSHOP!

REPLACE KEY1

VISIT WORKSHOP!

AUTOM. LIGHT ON

REMOVE KEY!

* C = Category, see page 274.

See page 55 for notes on the seat belts, and page 65 for
notes on the airbags.

* C = Category, see page 274.
1 Key needs possibly to be replaced.

FUEL RESERVE

UNDERVOLTAGE

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

RESERVE FUEL

VISIT FILLING STATION!

UNDERVOLTAGE

ENGINE ON!

UNDERVOLTAGE

CONSUMER DEFECTIVE!

* C = Category, see page 274.
* C = Category, see page 274.

Malfunction and warning messages
Instruments
and controls

Operation

291
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Malfunction and warning messages

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

292
ENTRANCE POSITION

STEERING WH. ADJUST

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

STEERING WH. ADJUST

LOCK!

ENTRANCE POSITION

DO NOT DRIVE!

* C = Category, see page 274.

For locking the manual steering wheel adjustment,
see page 77.

Wait until the seat and steering wheel have moved to
their driving positions. The display will clear when they
have done so.
See also page 41 for easy-entry/exit feature.

Contents - Practical hints
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage
compartment ............................. 304
Vehicle jack .................................... 305
Wheels ............................................ 306
Tire replacement ....................... 306
Rotating wheels ......................... 307
Spare wheel .................................... 308
Changing wheels ........................... 309
Tire inflation pressure ..................315
Battery ..............................................316
Jump starting ..................................318
Towing the vehicle ........................ 321
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking .................. 325

Exterior lamps ................................326
Replacing bulbs ..........................326
Trunk lamp .....................................331
Changing batteries in the electronic
main key .....................................332
Synchronizing remote
control ..........................................334
Emergency engine shut-down .....334
Fuel filler flap, manual release ...335
Replacing wiper blade insert .......337
Roof rack .........................................338

293
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

First aid kit
First aid kit

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

294
Stowing things in the vehicle
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the seat backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window.

The first aid kit is located in the storage space (1) in the
shelf below the rear window.
Lift cover. Remove first aid kit.

Index

Fuse box in the passenger compartment

Fuses
Most of your vehicle’s electrical components are fused
with safety fuses. With the exception of the brake lights,
all individual lighting system components are
electronically fused. Before replacing a blown safety
fuse, determine the cause of the short circuit. Always
observe amperage and color of fuse.
The circuit for components is protected by a cycled
circuit breaker interrupted if too much current is being
drawn. The circuit closes automatically after a short
time; the circuit is broken again if the malfunction
reoccurs.
Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to
repair or bridge a blown fuse.

1 Fuse box in passenger compartment

A fuse chart is located in fuse box (1).
A fuse extractor is located in the auxiliary fuse box in
the trunk, see page 296.

Fuses
Instruments
and controls

To gain access to fuse box, pull cover away from fuse
box (arrow) and remove rearward.

295
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Fuses

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

296
Fuse box in engine compartment

2 Fuse box in engine compartment, left-hand side
3 Tabs
To gain access to fuse box:
Release clamps (3) and remove the cover.
To close the fuse box:
Ensure that the sealing rubber is properly positioned
when you replace the cover. Press the cover down by
hand and secure with clamps (3).

Auxiliary fuse box in the trunk

4 Auxiliary fuse box in left hand side of trunk.
To open:
Remove the cover.
To close:
Press the cover on.

Index

Hood

The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils,
spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the
ignition system

Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the engine
is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed
before driving. When closing hood, use extreme
caution not to catch hands or fingers.

• with the engine running,
• while starting the engine,
• if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned
manually.

The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the
engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan
blades.
If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine
compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge
indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open
the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open
the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call a fire department.

Engine compartment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

297
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Engine compartment

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

298

P88.40-2137-26

To open:
To unlock the hood, pull release lever (1) under the
driver´s side of the instrument panel. At the same time
a handle will extend out of the radiator grill.

Pull handle (2) to its stop out of radiator grill and open
hood (do not pull up on the handle).
Note:
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, open
the hood only with the wipers in the parked position.

Index

To close:
Lower the hood and let it drop into lock from a height of
approximately 1 ft. (30 cm), assisting with hands placed
flat on edges of hood (3).
To avoid hood damage, please make sure that hood is
fully closed. If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not
push down on hood to attempt to fully close it.

P88.40-2138-26

Engine compartment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

299
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

300
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.
Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after
stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the
oil pan.
The engine oil level can be checked via the
multifunction display in the instrument cluster.
Unscrew the oil filler cap and add oil carefully if you
need to top up the oil. Fill quantity between upper and
lower dipstick marking level is approximately 2.1 US qt
(2.0 l). Re-install oil filler cap.

1 Oil filler cap

Do not overfill the engine. Excessive oil must be drained
or siphoned. It could cause damage to engine and
catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
See malfunction and warning messages on page 274 if
an engine oil level display appears on the multifunction
indicator when the engine is running.
Note:
See page 128 for engine oil level indicator.

Index

Coolant level

Automatic transmission fluid level
The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic
transmission fluid.
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and
changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is
omitted.
If you notice fluid leaks or gear shifting malfunctions,
have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission fluid level.

1 Coolant expansion tank
To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked
on level ground and the engine stopped.
Check coolant level only when coolant is cold.
The coolant level should reach the black top part of the
reservoir.
See page 359 for antifreeze/anticorrosion mixture.

Engine compartment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

301
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Engine compartment
Adding coolant

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

302
Windshield and headlamp washer system

If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and
MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added.
Warning!
• In order to avoid possibly serious burns:
Use extreme caution when opening the hood if
there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking
from the cooling system, or if the coolant
temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is
overheated.
• Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F
(90°C). Allow engine to cool down before
removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains
hot fluid and is under pressure.
• Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately
1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened
immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will
be blown out under pressure.
• Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine
parts.

1 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir
The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate
commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).

Index

Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio

Vehicles without headlamp cleaning system:
Capacity approximately 3.2 US qt (3.0 l)

For temperatures above freezing:
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water.

Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system:
Capacity approximately 6.4 US qt (6.0 l)

1 part “S” to 100 parts water
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water).

Warning!

For temperatures below freezing:

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do
not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine
parts, because it may burn. You can be seriously
burned.

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze.
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).

Engine compartment
Instruments
and controls

Operation

303
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Spare wheel
Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

304
Lift trunk floor and engage handle in upper edge of
trunk.
Always lower trunk floor before closing trunk lid.
To remove the spare wheel:
Take out the vehicle tool kit tray.
Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise and remove the
spare wheel.
To store spare wheel:
Place spare wheel in wheel well and secure it with
luggage bowl. Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop.
Place vehicle tool kit tray in luggage bowl.

1 Vehicle tool kit and towing eye bolt
2 Jack
3 Spare wheel
4 Storage tray

Index

Vehicle jack

To prepare the jack for use:

Storing the jack in the trunk:

Remove the jack from the spare wheel well under the
trunk floor.

Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with
handle folded in (storage position).

Push the crank handle up and turn clockwise until it
engages (operational position).

Jack
Instruments
and controls

305
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tires, Wheels

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

306

Warning!

Wheels

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the
vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either
side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury,
use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away
from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels before
raising vehicle with jack.

Replace rims or tires with the same designation,
manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.

Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm
is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always
lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the vehicle.

See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information on tested and recommended rims and tires
for summer and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Tire replacement
Front and rear tires should be replaced in sets. Rims
and tires must be of the correct size and type. For
dimensions, see “Technical Data”.
We recommend that you break in new tires for
approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed.

Index

Rotating wheels

It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be
fastened to a tightening torque of 110 ft.lb. (150 Nm)
whenever wheels are mounted.

The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of
tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel.

For rim and tire specifications, refer to “Technical Data”.

Rotating, however, should be carried out as
recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the
characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front
wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes
visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate.

Warning!
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread
is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained
damage, replace them.

Notes:

When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in
the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.

Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time
you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside.
The use of retread tires is not recommended. Retread
tires may adversely affect the handling characteristics
and safety of the vehicle.
Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads. For this reason, check rims for
damage at regular intervals. The rim flanges must be
checked for wear before a tire is mounted. Remove
burrs, if any.
Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after
rotating the wheels. For tire inflation pressure see
inside of fuel filler flap and also page 264.

Tires, Wheels
Instruments
and controls

307
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tires, Wheels

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

308

Spare wheel

Important!

The spare wheel rim size is 7 J x 16 H2
(C 240 Canada only - steel rims 61/2 J x 16 H2).

The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full size tire of
the same type as on the vehicle, and is fully functional.
However, that spare wheel rim is weight optimized and
has a limited service life of 12 000 miles (20 000 km)
use before a standard wheel rim must replace it.

In the case of a flat tire or breakdown, you may
temporarily use the spare wheel, while observing the
following restrictions:
• Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the
spare wheel.

• Drive to the nearest repair facility to have the flat
tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.

Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel
mounted.

• Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare
wheel mounted.

Warning!
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use
for over a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km)
(aggregate of all uses) may cause wheel rim failure
leading to an accident and possible injuries.

For additional information, refer to page 352.

Index

Changing wheels

Warning!
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use
for over a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) may
cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and
possible injuries.

Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the
vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either
side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury,
use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away
from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels before
raising vehicle with jack.

The dimensions of the spare wheel are different
from those of road wheels. As a result, the vehicle
handling characteristics change when driving with
a mounted spare wheel.
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily,
and replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly
as possible.

Tires, Wheels
Instruments
and controls

309
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tires, Wheels

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

310

Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance
from the roadway.
1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning
flasher.
2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off
engine (manual transmission to 1st or reverse gear).
3. Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking
wheels with wheel chocks (not supplied with
vehicle) or sizable wood block or stone. When
changing a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the
downhill side blocking both wheels of the other
axle. On an level road, place one chock in front of
and one behind the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the wheel being changed.

P40.10-2356-26

4. Vehicles with steel rims
Removal of wheel cover:
Reach into two opening of the wheel cover and pull.

Index

P40.10-2283-26

7. Place jack on firm ground. Position jack (1) under
the take-up bracket (2) so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the
vehicle is parked on an incline.

5. Remove the two-piece wheel wrench from the
vehicle tool kit and assemble (see page 305).
6. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the
wheel bolts.

The jack take-up brackets are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front of the
rear wheel housings.
8. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the
ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.

Tires, Wheels
Instruments
and controls

311
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tires, Wheels

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

312

P40.10-2284-26

9. Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and install
alignment bolt (1) supplied in the tool kit. Remove
the remaining bolts. Keep bolt threads protected
from dirt and sand.
10. Remove wheel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep
hands from beneath the wheels.

1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for steel rims (Canada model C 240)

Index

P40.10-2285-26

P40.10-2347-26

12. Lower vehicle and remove jack.

11. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.
Install spare wheel on wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts
and tighten them slightly.
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub
and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
Unscrew the alignment bolt to install the last wheel
bolt.

Tires, Wheels
Instruments
and controls

313
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Tires, Wheels

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

314

P40.10-2286-26

13. Using the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly,
following the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are
tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).

P40.10-2355-26

14. Vehicles with steel rims
Installation of wheel cover:
Position small wheel cover opening over tire valve
and press wheel cover against wheel rim. Now press
(do not hit) opposite side of wheel cover against
wheel rim until seated. Make certain that the
springs of the wheel cover are firmly seated in the
outer rim of the steel wheel.

Index

Notes:

Tire inflation pressure

Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with
handle folded in.

A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation
pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended
tires as well as for the varying operating conditions.

For proper storage of vehicle jack see page 304.

Important!

Warning!

Tire pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar)
per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage –
especially in the winter.

Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or
rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired
immediately.

Example:
If garage temperature = approximately +68°F (+20°C)
and ambient temperature = approximately +32°F (0°C)
then the adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure
+3 psi (+0.2 bar).

Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened
mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the
correct mounting bolts.

Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values
offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation
pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling
characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectly
permissible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will
become somewhat harder.
Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle
speed. Tire pressure should therefore only be checked
and corrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in
Tires, Wheels
Instruments
and controls

315
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Battery

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

316
warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the
pressure listed in the table and the respective operating
conditions are taken into consideration.

Battery

An underinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a
nail in the tire) may cause damage such as tread
separation, bulging etc. Regular tire pressure checks
(including the spare tire) at intervals of no more than
14 days are therefore essential.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in
severe injury or death.

If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for
damage.
The spare tire should be checked periodically for
condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become
worn over time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.

Warning!

Never lean over batteries while connecting, you
might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is
flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks
away from battery, avoid improper connection of
jumper cables, smoking etc.

Warning!
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they
are more likely to become punctured or damaged
by road debris, potholes etc. Follow recommended
inflation pressures.

Important!

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified
vehicle capacity weight as indicated by the label on
the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.

The service life of the battery is dependent on its
condition of charge. The battery should always be kept
sufficiently charged, in order to last an optimum length
of time.

Battery replacement information:
The maintenance-free battery is located in the engine
compartment on the right hand side.

Index

Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the
battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if
necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than
approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month,
mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for
long periods of time.
Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the
battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s
electrical circuit.
Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and
connect last.
When removing and connecting the battery, always
make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the
electronic key is in starter switch position 0. The
battery, its filler caps, the vent tube and the opposite
plug must always be securely installed when the vehicle
is in operation.

Removal of filter box:
Release three clamps (1) and remove filter box.
Installation of filter box:
Install filter box properly and secure with
three clamps (1).

While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps
must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the
generator and other electronic components would be
damaged.

Battery
Instruments
and controls

317
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Jump starting
Note:
After reconnecting the battery also set the clock
(vehicles with COMAND: see COMAND operator’s
manual) resynchronize the front seat head restraints,
the express feature of the power windows, the sliding/
pop-up roof, and the electronic stability program (see
individual settings on page 111, head restraints on
page 47, power windows on page 184, synchronizing the
sliding / pop-up roof on page 188 and electronic
stability program on page 260).
Battery recycling
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment with improper disposal.
Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of
disposal.
Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old
batteries for recycling.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

318
Jump starting
Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and can lead
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump
starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is
flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or
sparks away from battery, avoid improper
connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.
Read all instructions before proceeding.

Index

Important!
A discharged battery can freeze at approximately +14°F
(–10°C). In that case, it must be thawed out before
jumper cables are used. Attempting to jump start a
frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing
personal injury.
Jumper cable specifications:
• Minimum cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or
approximately 2 AWG
• Maximum length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m).
If the battery is discharged, the engine should be started
with jumper cables and the (12 V) battery of another
vehicle.

1 Negative (–) under hood terminal
2 Positive (+) under hood terminal

Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump
starting with more powerful battery could damage the
vehicle’s electrical systems, which will not be covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The battery is located in the engine compartment on the
right hand side.

Jump starting
Instruments
and controls

319
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Jump starting

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

320

Proceed as follows:
1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that
the jumper cables will reach, but never let the
vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
2. On both vehicles:
• Turn off engine and all lights and accessories,
except hazard warning flashers or work lights.
• Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to
position “P” (manual transmission to Neutral).
Important!
3. Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the
positive (+) under hood terminal of the discharged
battery and the other end to the positive (+) terminal
of the charged battery. Make sure the cable clamps
do not touch any other metal parts.
4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the
grounded negative (–) terminal of the charged
battery and the final connection to the negative (–)
under hood terminal of the disabled vehicle.

Important!
5. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery
and run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not
on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move
when the engine is started. Allow the discharged
battery to charge for a few minutes. Start engine of
the disabled vehicle in the usual manner.
6. After the engine has started, remove jumper cables
by exactly reversing the above installation
sequence, starting with the last connection made
first. When removing each clamp, make sure that it
does not touch any other metal while the other end
is still attached.

Index

Note:

Towing the vehicle

If engine does not run after several unsuccessful
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning!
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, make certain that the electronic key is in
starter switch position 2.

Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic
converter.

If the electronic key is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the
steering is locked. To unlock, remove electronic key
from starter switch and reinsert.

Towing the vehicle
Instruments
and controls

Operation

321
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Towing the vehicle

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

322

Important!
When towing the vehicle, please, note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and the
electronic key in starter switch position 2, the vehicle
doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear
wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking. See
“VEHICLE” under “Individual settings” on page 119.
Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the
properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow
cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame
or suspension parts.

1 Cover on right side of front bumper

The selector lever will remain locked in position “P” and
the electronic key cannot be turned in the starter switch
if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See battery
on page 316 or jump starting on page 318.

To remove cover:
Press mark on cover in direction of arrow and lift cover
off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The
towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in
trunk in spare wheel). Screw towing eye bolt in to its
stop and tighten with lug wrench.

Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking, see
page 325.

To reinstall cover:
Fit cover and snap into place.

Notes:

Index

We recommend that the vehicle be transported using
flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other
types of towing.
Important!
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down
vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
Towing restrictions for vehicles with automatic
transmission:
The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground
and the selector lever in position “N” for distances up to
30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). The electronic key must be in starter switch
position 2.

2 Cover on right side of rear bumper

To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the
transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft
be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any
towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.

Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with
sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage
radiator and supports.

To reinstall cover:
Fit cover and snap into place.

Towing the vehicle
Instruments
and controls

Operation

323
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Towing the vehicle

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

324

Use wheel lift, dolly, or flat bed equipment, with
electronic key in starter switch turned to position 0.

Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning
flasher will operate again.

Warning!

Caution!

With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the braking and steering systems. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that a
considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to
brake and steer the vehicle.

If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the
engine must be shut off (electronic key in starter switch
position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes.

Note:
To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning
flasher in use, turn electronic key in starter switch to
position 2 and activate combination switch for left or
right turn signal in usual manner – only the selected
turn signal will operate.

Switch off the tow-away alarm (see page 39) as well as
the ESP (see page 260).

Index

Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking

To do so, open storage compartment in front of center
armrest.
Using a small coin, release the coin holder (1) and
swing it aside.
Insert a tool (2), e.g. the screw driver, into the opening
below the coin holder. While pushing the tool down,
move selector lever from position “P”.
After removal of the tool from the opening, reinstall the
coin holder.
The selector lever is locked again when moving it to
position “P”.

In the case of power failure the transmission selector
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.

Towing the vehicle
Instruments
and controls

Operation

325
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Exterior lamps

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

326

Exterior lamps

Replacing bulbs

Headlamp adjustment

Warning!

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important.
Check and readjust headlamps at regular intervals and
when a bulb has been replaced.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
and its components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.

Warning!

Notes:

Bulbs and bulb holders can be very hot. Allow the
lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can
explode if you:
• touch or move it when hot,
• drop the bulb,
• scratch the bulb.
Wear eye and hand protection.

To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off
lamp prior to replacing a bulb.
When replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with
the specified watt rating.
When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass
portion of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a
clean cloth.
If the newly installed bulb does not light up, switch the
lamp off and on again. If the bulb still does not light up,
have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Index

Headlamp assembly

1 Headlamp cover for low beam headlamp

3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp

2 Headlamp cover for parking and standing lamp, and
high beam headlamp

4 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb
(Halogen type)
5 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp

Exterior lamps
Instruments
and controls

327
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Exterior lamps

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

328

Bulbs for high and low beam
H7 (55 W)

Turn signal lamp
1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp)

Open hood.

Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover (1 or 2).

Twist bulb socket (3) counterclockwise and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.

Pull electrical connector off.
Unclip the retainer spring and take out the bulb.
Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the
recess on the holder.

Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.
Reinstall bulb socket.

Clip in retainer springs and plug the connector onto the
bulb.

Parking and standing lamp
W 5W

Align headlamp cover (1 or 2) and click into place.

Open hood.

Xenon (optional)
Bulb for low beam

Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover (2).

Warning!
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
and its components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.

Pull out bulb socket (6). Remove bulb from socket.
Insert new bulb in socket and push in. Reinstall bulb
socket.
Align headlamp cover (2) and click into place.

Index

Taillamp assemblies

2 Driver’s side:
rear fog lamp
(P 21 W/32 cp bulb)

Open trunk lid.
Fold trim to the side.
Turn locking lever (1) to vertical position and remove
bulb carrier.

3 Backup lamp (P 21 W/32 cp bulb)

Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.

4 Stop lamp (P 21 W/32 cp bulb)

Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.
Reinstall bulb socket.

6 tail, parking, standing and
side marker lamp (R 5 W/4 cp bulb)

5 Turn signal lamp (PY 21 W bulb [yellow])

Reinstall trim.
Exterior lamps
Instruments
and controls

329
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Exterior lamps
License plate lamp

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

330
High mounted stop lamp,
Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror
The high mounted stop lamp (3rd brake lamp), and the
additional turn signals on the exterior mirrors are
equipped with LEDs.
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center if a malfunction occurs.

Loosen both securing screws (1), remove lamp and
replace tubular lamp (C 5 W/4 cp).

Index

Standby bulb function

Trunk lamp

a) The stop lamps, dimmed, will act as a replacement
lamp, if one taillamp stops working.

The trunk lamp will switch off after approximately
10 minutes if the trunk lid is left open.

b) The left stop lamp acts as a replacement for the rear
fog lamp, if it stops working.
c) The respective fog lamp, dimmed, will act as a
replacement lamp, if the left or right standing lamp
stops working.
Notes:
The multifunction display will indicate that a bulb has
failed. See malfunction and warning messages on
page 274.

Trunk lamp
Instruments
and controls

331
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Electronic main key

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

332

Changing batteries in the electronic main key

2
1

3
4
P80.20-2201-26

P80.35-2029-26

1 Transmit buttons

Changing batteries

2 Lamp for battery check and function control

Move locking tab (3) in direction of right arrow and
remove mechanical key (4, left arrow).

Checking batteries
If one of the transmit buttons (1) is pressed, the battery
check lamp (2) lights up briefly – indicating that the
batteries are in order.
Change batteries if the battery check lamp (2) does not
light up briefly.

Index

5
4
6
P80.35-2025-26

P80.35-2027-26

Change batteries (7), inserting new ones under contact
spring (8) with plus (+) side facing up.

Insert mechanical key (4) in side opening (5) to open
latch. Press briefly (do not use mechanical key as lever)
to release battery compartment.

Return battery compartment into housing until locked
in place and slide mechanical key back into electronic
main key.

Remove mechanical key from side opening.
Carefully remove battery compartment in direction of
arrow (6).

Electronic main key
Instruments
and controls

Operation

333
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Emergency engine shut-down

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

334

Important!

Emergency engine shut-down

Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of
batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For
disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation
on battery package.

If the engine can no longer be stopped using the
electronic key, the engine can be turned off by removing
two fuses.

Replacement Battery:
Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.

For easy removal of fuses use the fuse extractor (located
in the auxiliary fuse box in the trunk) to pull out the
fuses marked on the fuse chart as “ENGINE
EMERGENCY OFF”.

Synchronizing remote control

The fuse chart is located in the fuse box in the
passenger compartment.

The remote control may have to be resynchronized, if
the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked.
To synchronize insert electronic key in starter switch.
The remote control should once again be operational.

For fuses see page 295.

Index

Fuel filler flap, manual release

Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof

Open the trunk lid and fold right-side taillamp trim
aside. Reach inside and pull the release knob (arrow).
Open the fuel filler flap.

The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur.

Emergency engine shut-down
Instruments
and controls

Operation

The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind the
lens (1) of the interior overhead light.

335
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Emergency engine shut-down

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

336

Slide both locking tabs (2) in direction of arrow, lower
rear of cover and remove.

Obtain crank (3) (supplied with vehicle) and insert
through hole.

Note:

To slide roof closed or to raise the roof at the rear:
turn crank clockwise.

Do not disconnect electrical connectors.

To slide the roof open or to lower the roof at the rear:
turn crank counterclockwise.
See page 188 for instructions on synchronizing the
sliding/pop-up roof after closing manually.

Index

Replacing wiper blade inserts
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from steering
lock before replacing the wiper blades, otherwise the
motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Notes:
Do not open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward.
Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield
glass without a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be
scratched or broken.
Make certain that the wiper blades are properly
installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause
windshield damage.

Removal:
Fold wiper arm forward. Press safety tab down (1), push
wiper blade downward (2) and remove.

Replacing wiper blade insert
Instruments
and controls

Operation

337
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Replacing wiper blade insert

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

338
Roof rack

Place wiper blade on firm support. Press down both tabs
and slide (direction of arrow) the wiper blade insert out
of the retainer claws.
Installation:
Slide (direction of arrow) wiper blade insert into
retainer claws until tabs are engaged.
Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until it locks in place.

Only mount roof racks to the fastening bolts (see arrows)
located under the door weatherstrips.
Use only those roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz to
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s
installation instructions.

Index

Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of
the vehicle ..................................340
Power washer .............................. 341
Tar stains ..................................... 341
Paintwork, painted body
components ................................. 341
Engine cleaning ..........................342
Vehicle washing .........................342
Ornamental moldings ................343
Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal
lenses ...........................................343

Contents - Vehicle care
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Window cleaning ....................... 343
Wiper blade ................................ 343
Light alloy wheels ..................... 344
Instrument cluster ..................... 344
Steering wheel and gear selector
lever ............................................. 344
Cup holder .................................. 344
Seat belts ..................................... 345
Headliner and shelf below rear
window ........................................ 345
Leather upholstery .................... 345
Hard plastic trim items ............. 345
Plastic and rubber parts ........... 345

339
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow
the instructions on the particular container.
Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when
cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed
for cleaning your vehicle.
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying
external influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and
cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying
climatic conditions, but also by air polution, road salt,
tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins
etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint
damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eli minates
the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse
influences.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

340
More frequent washings are necessary to deal with
unfavorable conditions; for example, near the ocean, in
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during
winter operation.
You should check your vehicle from time to time for
stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be
repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of
corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underside of the vehicle.
A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the
underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged
areas need to be reundercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a waxbase rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for
the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz
because of the possibility of incompatibility between
materials used in the production process and others
applied later.
We have selected car-care products and compiled
recommendations which are specially matched to our
vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Index

Tar stains

Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due
to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed
or repaired with the car-care products recommended
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become
more difficult to remove. A tar remover is
recommended.

The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of
your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as
well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.

Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied
when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”,
normally in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and
washing detergent used.

Additional information can be found in the booklet titled
“Vehicle Care Guide”.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be
applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding
(i.e. loss of gloss).

Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle
always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions.

Do not apply any of these products or wax if your
vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and
provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips
from stones, vehicle doors etc.).

Caution!
Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The
intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface.
Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical
connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Instruments
and controls

Operation

341
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Cleaning and care of the vehicle

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

342

Engine cleaning

Vehicle washing

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to
protect electrical components and connectors from the
intrusion of water and cleaning agents.

Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.

Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax
should be applied to the engine compartment after
every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control
linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any
wax.

Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of
water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the
ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a
chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, prior to running the
vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold back the
outside mirrors to prevent them from getting damaged.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt
as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the
inner sides of the wheels.

Index

Ornamental moldings

Window cleaning

For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chromeplated parts, use a chrome cleaner.

Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An
automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
Note:

Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove
electronic key from starter switch before cleaning the
windshield, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly
turn on and cause injury.

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use
only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or
sponge.

Wiper blades
Clean the wiper blade rubbers with a clean cloth and
detergent solution.
Note:
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from starter
switch before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the
wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.

Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Instruments
and controls

Operation

343
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Cleaning and care of the vehicle

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

344

Light alloy wheels

Instrument cluster

Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for
regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels.

Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.

If possible, clean wheels once a week with MercedesBenz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush
and a strong spray of water.
Follow instructions on container.

Steering wheel and gear selector lever

Note:

Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean
with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

Use only acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could
lead to corrosion.

Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.

Index

Seat belts

Leather upholstery

The webbing must not be treated with chemical
cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and
soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.

Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that
have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet
etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be
prevented.

Warning!

Leather Upholstery
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry
thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside should not become
wet.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely
weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Headliner and shelf below rear window
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

MB Tex Upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.

Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Instruments
and controls

Operation

345
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Contents - Technical data
Instruments
and controls

Operation

347
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Technical data

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

348

Spare parts service

Warranty coverage

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock
of original spare parts required for maintenance and
repair work. In addition, strategically located parts
distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts
service.

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
“warranties” printed in the Service and Warranty
Information booklet and your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any
defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following warranties:

More than 300 000 different spare parts, for
Mercedes-Benz models, are available.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to
stringent quality inspections. Each part has been
specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and
adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should
be installed.
Important!
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not
authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle
which damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty or compromise its durability or safety.

1. New vehicle limited warranty
2. Emission systems warranty
3. Emission performance warranty
4. California, Massachusetts, and Vermont emission
control systems warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties,
copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information
booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Index

Identification labels

1 Certification label

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(below right rear passenger seat)

Technical data
Instruments
and controls

349
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Technical data

Practical hints

Technical
data

Car care

350
Layout of poly-V-belt drive

5
6

6
1
7
4
2
3

3 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)

1 Automatic belt tensioner

4 Engine number

2 Crankshaft

5 Emission control label

3 Air conditioner compressor

6 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission control system

4 Generator (alternator)

When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine numbers.

5 Idler pulley
6 Power steering pump
7 Coolant pump, fan

Index

Technical data
C 240 (203.0611)

Model

C 320 (203.0641)

Engine

112.912

112.946

Mode of operation

4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

No. of cylinders

Bore

3.54 in (89.90 mm)

Stroke

2.68 in (68.20 mm)

3.30 in (84.00 mm)
3

Total piston displacement

158,5 cu.in. (2597 cm )

195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)

Compression ratio

10:1

Output acc. to SAE J 1349

167 hp/6000 rpm
(125 kW/6000 rpm)

221 hp/5600 rpm
(165 kW/5600 rpm)

Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 130 ft.lb/4500 rpm
(240 Nm/4500 rpm)

232 ft.lb/3000 rpm
(315 Nm/3000 rpm)

Maximum engine speed

6200 rpm

6000 rpm

Firing order

1-4-3-6-2-5

Poly-V-belt

2390 mm

1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies
and special equipment.

Technical data
Instruments
and controls

351
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Technical data

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

352

Rims — Tires
Model

C 240 (203.061)

C 320 (203.064)

C 240 (Canada only – incl. spare wheel)

Rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset:

7J x 16 H2
1.46 in (37 mm)

(steel rims) 61/2 J x 16 H2
1.46 in (37 mm)

All season tires:
Radial-ply tires

205/55 R16 91 H

205/55 R 16 91 H

Winter tires:
Radial-ply tires

205/55 R16 91 H M+S

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S

Rim (light alloy)
Wheel offset:

7J x 16 H2
1.46 in (37 mm)

All season tires:
Radial-ply tires

205/55 R16 91 H

Spare wheel

Index

Electrical system
Model

C 240 (203.061)

C 320 (203.064)

Generator (alternator)

14 V/120 A

Starter motor

12V/1.7 kW

Battery

12V/100 Ah

Spark plugs

Bosch F 8 DPER
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2
NGK IFR 5 D 10
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)

Electrode gap
Tightening torque
Weights
Roof load max.

220 lb (100 kg)

Trunk load max.

220 lb (100 kg)

Technical data
Instruments
and controls

353
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Technical data

Practical hints

354

Main Dimensions
Model

C 240 (203.061)
C 320 (203.064)

Overall vehicle length

178.2 in (4526 mm)

Overall vehicle width

68.0 in (1728 mm)

Overall vehicle height

56.1 in (1426 mm)

Wheel base

106.9 in (2715 mm)

Track, front

59.3 in (1505 mm)

Track, rear

58.1 in (1476 mm)

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and recommended
by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Center.
Capacity

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Engine with oil filter

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Recommended engine oils

Automatic transmission

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Automatic transmission fluid

Rear axle

1.2 US qt (1.1 l)

Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90

Power steering

approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)

MB Power steering fluid

Front wheel hubs

approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each

High temperature roller bearing grease

Brake system

approx. 0.5 US qt (0.5 l)

MB Brake fluid (DOT 4+)

Cooling system

approx. 9.5 US qt (10.5 l)

MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze

Fuel tank

16.4 US gal (62.0 l)

Premium unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)

including a reserve of

2.1 US gal (8.0 l)

Accelerator control linkage

Hydraulic fluid

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

355
Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities

Car care

Technical
data

356

Capacity
Air conditioner system
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system

Practical hints

Vehicles without headlamp
cleaning system:
Capacity approx. 3.2 US qt
(3.0 l)

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
(Never R-12)
MB Windshield washer concentrate1

Vehicles with headlamp
cleaning system:
Capacity approx. 6.4 US qt
(6.0 l)
1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios, see
page 303.

Index

Engine oils

Air conditioner refrigerant

Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in
our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on
recommended brands is available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil
is used in the air conditioner system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil,
otherwise damage to the system will occur.

Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in
engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake
fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of
moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard
operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to
the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing
the system’s efficiency.

Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be
harmful to the engine operation.

The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two
years, preferably in the spring.

Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will provide you with additional information.

357
Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

358

Premium unleaded gasoline

Fuel requirements

Caution!

Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM
standard D 439:

To maintain the engine’s durability and performance,
premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium
unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used,
follow these precautions:

The octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane
number and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2).
This is also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

• have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded
regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible,
• avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration,
• do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm, if the
vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two
persons and no luggage,
• do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal
position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as
Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the
ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%, MTBE not to exceed 15%.
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3%
plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed.
Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded
gasoline, can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements
such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor
pressure etc.

Index

Gasoline additives

Coolants

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon
build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz
recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
• corrosion protection,
• freeze protection,

After an extended period of using fuels without such
additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the
intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:

• boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point).
The cooling system was filled at the factory with a
coolant providing freeze protection to approximately
- 22°F (- 30°C) and corrosion protection.

• warm-up hesitation,

If the antifreeze mixture is effective to - 22°F (- 30°C),
the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized
cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F
(130°C).

• unstable idle,
• knocking/pinging,
• misfire,

The coolant solution must be used year round to provide
the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the
boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every
3 years.

• power loss.
Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel.
They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be
harmful to the engine operation.

To provide the important corrosion protection, the
solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze
(equals a freeze protection to approximately - 22°F
(- 30°C). If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to
approximately - 49°F (- 45°C), the engine temperature

Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel
quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

359
Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of
the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this
amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/
antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
The water in the cooling system must meet minimum
requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal
drinking water. If your are not sure about the water
quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminium parts. The
use of aluminium components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used
in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the
aluminium parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/
antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly
shortened service life.)
Therefore the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz
anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

360
Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in
the hot southern regions), you should have the
anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The
coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring
your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Approximately freeze protection
– 35°F
(– 37°C)

– 49°F
(– 45°C)

4.8 US qt
(4.5 l)

5.3 US qt
(5.0 l)

Index

Consumer information

may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

This has been prepared as required of all manufactures
of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.

Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Tread wear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straightahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and

Consumer information
Instruments
and controls

Operation

361
Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Consumer information

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

362

Temperature

Warning!

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire‘s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause excessive heat build up
and possible tire failure.

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Index

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

364

Index
A
Airbags .............................................................................. 65
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
Malfunction and warning message ........................277
Antilock brake system (ABS) .......................................258
Antitheft alarm system ................................................... 38
Ashtrays .......................................................................... 199
Audio system
Button and soft key operation ................................. 163
Cassette mode ........................................................... 169
CD changer ................................................................ 174
CD mode ..................................................................... 173
Operating and display elements ............................. 161
Operating safety ........................................................ 160
Operation ................................................................... 163
Operation Audio and telephone .............................. 160
Radio mode ................................................................ 166
Telephone operation ................................................. 177
Audio systems .................................................................. 98
Cassette player .......................................................... 100
CD Player ...................................................................... 99
Radio ............................................................................. 98

Automatic central locking ..............................................34
Automatic climate control ............................................146
Activated charcoal filter ...........................................154
Adjustable air outlets,
rear passenger compartment .............................159
Air recirculation ........................................................153
Air volume, manual .................................................. 151
Basic setting ...............................................................150
Defrosting ...................................................................152
Display and controls .................................................148
Dust filter ...................................................................150
Economy mode ..........................................................155
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation .....................................158
Residual engine heat utilization .............................156
Special settings ......................................................... 151
Windows fogged up on the inside ..........................152
Windows fogged up on the outside ........................152
Automatic transmission ............................................... 234
Fluid level ...................................................................301
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking ............................................ 325

Index

Climate control ...............................................................138
Adjustable air outlets,
rear passenger compartment .............................159
Air recirculation ........................................................144
Basic setting ...............................................................142
Defrosting ...................................................................143
Display and controls .................................................140
Dust filter ................................................................... 141
Economy mode ..........................................................145
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation .....................................158
Residual engine heat utilization .............................145
Special settings .........................................................142
Windows fogged up on the inside ..........................143
Windows fogged up on the outside ........................144
COMAND, radio, telephone and two-way radio ......... 218
Combination switch .......................................................134
Control and operation of radio transmitters .............. 218
Coolant level ...................................................................301
Coolant temperature gauge ..........................................124
Cruise control ................................................................ 254
Cup holder .......................................................................197

BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ..................... 62
Battery ............................................................................. 316
Block heater ....................................................................252
Brake assist system (BAS) ............................................257

C
Cellular telephone ......................................................... 210
Center console .................................................................. 18
Central locking switch .................................................... 33
Central locking system ................................................... 25
Automatic central locking ......................................... 34
Central locking switch ............................................... 33
Choosing global or selective mode ........................... 27
Doors ............................................................................. 31
General notes ............................................................... 24
Locking and unlocking with remote control .......... 27
Mechanical keys .......................................................... 30
Obtaining replacement keys ..................................... 23
Summer opening/convenience feature ................... 29
Vehicle keys ................................................................. 22
Check regularly and before a long trip ......................266
Checking engine oil level .............................................300
Index
Instruments
and controls

365
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Index

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

366

D
Dashboard ......................................................................... 16
Door control panel ........................................................... 14
Door entry lamps ........................................................... 190
Drive sensibly - Save Fuel ............................................244

E
Easy-entry/exit feature ................................................... 41
Electronic main key ......................................................... 23
Changing batteries ...................................................332
Synchronizing remote control ................................334
Electronic stability program (ESP) ..............................260
Emergency engine shut-down .....................................334
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof ............335
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) ......................... 64
Emergency unlocking in case of accident ................... 34
Engine oil consumption ................................................ 129
Engine oil level indicator .............................................. 128
Enlarged cargo area .......................................................207
ENTRANCE POSITION - malfunction and warning
messages ....................................................................292
Exterior lamp switch ..................................................... 130
Daytime running lamp mode .................................. 132
Exterior lamps ................................................................326

Additional turn signals on
the exterior mirror .............................................. 330
Bulbs for high and low beam ................................. 328
Headlamp assembly ................................................. 327
High mounted stop lamp ......................................... 330
License plate lamps ................................................. 330
Parking and standing lamp .................................... 328
Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 326
Taillamp assemblies ................................................ 329
Turn signal lamp ...................................................... 328
Exterior mirror adjustment ............................................ 81
Exterior mirror, front passenger side,
parking position ..........................................................82

F
First aid kit ..................................................................... 294
Flexible service system (FSS) ......................................125
Front airbags ....................................................................65
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation .........................................158
Front seat adjustment .....................................................42
Fuel filler flap, manual release ................................... 335
Fuel reserve warning .....................................................271
Fuses ............................................................................... 295

Index

Child seat mounts ....................................................... 76
Installation ...................................................................75
Instrument cluster ...........................................................88
Instruments and controls ............................................... 12
Center console ............................................................. 18
Dashboard .................................................................... 16
Door control panel ...................................................... 14
Overhead control panel .............................................. 15
Interior .............................................................................193
Interior lighting ..............................................................189

Garage door opener ....................................................... 212
Glove box ......................................................................... 194

H
Hazard warning flasher switch ................................... 137
Head restraints
Rear seat ....................................................................... 52
Head restraints, front seats
Removal and installation ........................................... 47
Headlamp cleaning system .......................................... 133
Headlamp mode ............................................................. 131
Heated seats ..................................................................... 50

Jack .................................................................................. 305
Jump starting .................................................................. 318

Identification labels .......................................................349
Individual settings ..........................................................111
"CONVENIENCE" ...................................................... 121
"INSTRUMENT CLUSTER" .......................................113
"LIGHTING" ................................................................117
"VEHICLE" ..................................................................119
Infant and child restraint systems ................................ 73

Lighter .............................................................................201
Loading instructions
(Vehicle with enlarged cargo area) ....................... 209
Locator lighting ..............................................................133
Locking the vehicle with remote control .....................27

Index
Instruments
and controls

367
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Index

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

368

Maintenance ................................................................... 219
Malfunction/warning message memory .................... 109
Manual seat ............................................................... 45, 48
Manual transmission ....................................................233
Memory function ............................................................. 85
Mirror, exterior, parking position,
front passenger side ................................................... 82
Multicontour seat ............................................................ 49
Multifunction display ...................................................... 92
Coolant temperature ................................................... 96
Engine oil level indicator ........................................... 96
FSS ................................................................................ 96
Individual settings .....................................................111
Tire inflation pressure monitor ................................ 96
Trip and main odometer ............................................ 96
Vehicle speed ............................................................... 96
Multifunction steering wheel ........................................ 92

On-board diagnostic system ........................................ 268
Overhead control panel ................................................... 15

P
Panic button ......................................................................30
Parcel net in front passenger footwell ....................... 202
Parking brake ................................................................ 243
Power windows ...............................................................184
Blocking of rear door window operation ...............186
Express opening and closing ..................................185
Opening and closing ...................................................29
Synchronizing power windows ...............................186
Problems with your vehicle .............................................. 8
Product information .......................................................... 1

R
N
Navigation system .......................................................... 106
Night security illumination ......................................... 132

Rain sensor .....................................................................135
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air outlets ................................................159
Rear window defroster ..................................................157
Rear window sunshade ................................................. 191

Index

Removal and installation of
front seat head restraints .......................................... 47
Replacement keys
Obtaining ..................................................................... 23
Replacing wiper blade insert .......................................337
Reporting Safety Defects .................................................. 9
REST .........................................................................145, 156
Roof rack .........................................................................338

Ski sack .......................................................................... 202
Sliding/pop-up roof ........................................................187
Opening and closing ...................................................29
Synchronizing ...........................................................188
Spare wheel ................................................................... 308
Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment .... 304
Split folding rear seat bench ....................................... 207
Standby bulb function ...................................................331
Start lock-out .....................................................................24
Starter switch ................................................................. 230
Starting and turning off the engine ........................... 232
STEER. WHEEL ADJUST. - malfunction and warning
messages ................................................................... 292
Steering lock
See starter switch ..................................................... 230
Steering wheel
Easy-entry/exit feature .............................................. 41
Steering wheel adjustment
electrical .......................................................................79
manual ..........................................................................77
Storage compartments and armrests ..........................193
Storing mirror positions ................................................. 81
Storing seat positions ......................................................44
Stowing things in the vehicle ..................................... 294
Sun visors ........................................................................192
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..........................63

S
Seat belt nonusage warning system ............................. 56
Seat belts ........................................................................... 55
Fastening ...................................................................... 58
Operation ..................................................................... 59
Unfastening .................................................................. 59
Warning lamp ............................................................273
Seat belts and integrated
restraint system .......................................................... 55
Seats
Front seat adjustment ................................................ 42
Manual seat ................................................................. 45
Power seat .................................................................... 43
Setting the audio volume .............................................. 123
Side impact airbags ......................................................... 68
Index
Instruments
and controls

369
Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

Index

Instruments
and controls

Operation

Driving

Instrument
cluster display

Index

Practical hints

Car care

Technical
data

370

Technical data ................................................................ 351
Tele Aid ...........................................................................220
Initiating an emergency call ...................................222
Telephone ........................................................................ 101
Incoming call ............................................................. 105
Redialing .................................................................... 103
Telephone book ......................................................... 101
Telephone, general ........................................................ 211
Telephones and two-way radios ................................... 218
Telescoping steering column malfunction and warning messages ......................292
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ................................ 219
Tire inflation pressure .................................................. 315
Tow-away alarm ................................................................ 39
Towing the vehicle ......................................................... 321
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking ....325
Trip computer ................................................................. 107
Trunk ................................................................................. 35
Opening ........................................................................ 28
Release switch ............................................................. 37
Trunk lamp ..................................................................... 331

Unlocking the vehicle with remote control .................27

V
Vanity mirrors ................................................................192
Vehicle keys ......................................................................22
Vehicle tools ................................................................... 304

W
What you should know at the gas station ................. 264
Wheels ............................................................................ 306
Where to find it .................................................................. 7
Window curtain airbag ....................................................68
Windshield washer system .......................................... 302
Wiper blade
Replacing insert ....................................................... 337

Index

Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your
vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com.
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper
or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this
Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.00-3006-26
Press time 03/31/00
MBUSA/TI
Printed in the U.S.A.

Order No. 6515 0057 13 Part No. 203 584 28 81 USA Edition A 2001

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Modify Date                     : 2013:06:08 14:11:54-04:00
Create Date                     : 2013:06:08 14:11:54-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2013:06:08 14:11:54-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:2af80e33-33b6-4dd7-b4b7-8b8f860d8cf3
Instance ID                     : uuid:dc62b1a5-8cdf-4c0a-876a-f63ac5a3efb0
Page Mode                       : UseThumbs
Page Count                      : 381

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Mercedes Benz 2001 C Class Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation